Queensland schools are currently implementing: the Australian Curriculum for English, Mathematics, Science and History in Prep to Year 10, the Queensland curriculum for the remaining areas of the curriculum in Prep to Year 10, and the Queensland Senior schooling curriculum  for Years 11 & 12. The Australian Curriculum will gradually replace the Queensland curriculum. Queensland Government – Dept. of Education and Training

With this in mind, FutureSchool provides both the Australian Curriculum and the Queensland Curriculum for your family or school. This will remain in place until the full rollout and integration has been completed.

Whatever level your family, you can rest assured that FutureSchool will complement and work hand-in-hand with their current schoolwork.

For those schools that offer the International Baccalaureate or Cambridge International Examinations curricula, these are also available within FutureSchool as part of its standard curriculum library.

Find out more about home schooling in Australia.

To see more detail about lessons covered within our subjects, just click on your state from the list:







Mathematics

QLD Preparatory Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Preparatory
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2Using and applying numberThe numbers 1 to 5
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write and identify the words and numerals for the numbers 1 to 5
3Time, days of weekDays of the week
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name the days of the week in order, recognise them in a written form, be able to answer questions about the days of the week, and have an understanding of a diary.
4ExamExam – Preparatory
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 1 Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 1
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2Using and applying numberThe numbers 1 to 5
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write and identify the words and numerals for the numbers 1 to 5
3Using and applying numberThe numbers 6 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match cardinal words and numbers with groups of 6-9 objects.
4The number systemOrdinal numbers 1 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match ordinal words and numbers with groups of 1-9 objects.
5Using and applying numberZero and counting numbers 1 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, write and match the numeral and word for the number zero.
6Using and applying numberThe number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the number 10, count up to 10 objects and to match a group of objects to the correct number.
7Weight/massIntroducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
8Time, days of weekDays of the week
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name the days of the week in order, recognise them in a written form, be able to answer questions about the days of the week, and have an understanding of a diary.
9ReasoningSimple addition up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences that show numbers adding up to another number.
10CalculationsSubtraction up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences up to the number 10.
11LengthCompare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
12Time, durationDuration
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and measure the duration of an event using informal units, and compare and order the duration of an event using informal units.
13Lines and anglesDescribing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
14Time, digitalO’clock and half past using digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock.
15Time, analogueO’clock and half past on the analogue clock
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock.
16ExamExam – Year 1 – Level 1
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 2 Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 2
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2Using and applying numberZero and counting numbers 1 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, write and match the numeral and word for the number zero.
3Using and applying numberThe number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the number 10, count up to 10 objects and to match a group of objects to the correct number.
4Using and applying numberNumbers 11 to 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the numbers 11 to 20, count up to 20 and match a group of objects to the correct number.
5Using and applying numberUsing place value to order numbers up to 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to order numbers up to the value of 20.
6ReasoningSimple addition up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences that show numbers adding up to another number.
7ReasoningSimple addition up to the number 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences and also write addition in a vertical format using numbers up to 20.
8CalculationsSubtraction up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences up to the number 10.
9CalculationsSubtraction by Comparison
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods.
10CalculationsSubtraction up to the number 20 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences.
11CalculationsThe numbers 20 to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify, name and add groups of ten, counting to ninety-nine.
12Calculation 10-100Counting by 1, 2, 5, and 10 to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to skip count to one hundred and show that one hundred equals ten times ten.
13AdditionAddition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
14SubtractionSubtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
15Time, durationDuration
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and measure the duration of an event using informal units, and compare and order the duration of an event using informal units.
16Time, monthsMonths and seasons of the year
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and order the months of the year, know the number of days in each month, name the seasons in order, and know the number of months in each season.
17Time, digitalO’clock and half past using digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock.
18Time, analogueO’clock and half past on the analogue clock
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock.
19Time, minutesAnalogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock.
20Lines and anglesDescribing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
21DataPictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
22LengthCompare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
23LengthUsing the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
24Weight/massIntroducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
25Measurement – Advanced areaComparing and Ordering Areas
Objective: To estimate size order and count or estimate area as the number of cm squares
26ExamExam – Year 2 – Level 1
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 3 Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 3
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2CalculationsSubtraction by Comparison
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods.
3CalculationsSubtraction up to the number 20 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences.
4CalculationsThe numbers 20 to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify, name and add groups of ten, counting to ninety-nine.
5Calculation 10-100Counting by 1, 2, 5, and 10 to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to skip count to one hundred and show that one hundred equals ten times ten.
6AdditionAddition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
7SubtractionSubtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
8SubtractionSubtraction with borrowing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method
9SubtractionSubtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct.
10AdditionAddition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
11LengthCompare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
12LengthUsing the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
13Weight/massIntroducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
14Weight/massThe kilogram
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales.
15AreaComparing and ordering areas.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and compare the area of shapes using a standard unit and order shapes according to their area.
16FractionsUsing fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
17FractionsUsing fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
18FractionsComparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
19Time, monthsMonths and seasons of the year
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and order the months of the year, know the number of days in each month, name the seasons in order, and know the number of months in each season.
20Time, minutesAnalogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock.
21Time, digitalO’clock and half past using digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock.
22Time, analogueO’clock and half past on the analogue clock
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock.
23Time, quarter to, pastQuarter past and quarter to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’.
24Time, minutes past the hourMinutes past
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock.
25Time, minutes to the hourMinutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
26Time, digital, analogueComparing analogue and digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks.
27DataPictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
28DataBar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
29Calculation-groupingMultiplication using equal groups
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows and will understand how to count them.
30Calculation-groupingMultiplication using repeated addition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows using another method and also learn different ways to count them.
31Time, distance, speedAverage speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
32Calculation sharing/divisionStrategies for division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to share objects equally and will also learn how to write about them.
33Calculation-multiplesMultiples of 10 up to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write, rename and add multiples of ten.
34Calculation-larger numbersThe numbers 100 to 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
35MultiplicationMultiplication – important facts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences.
36ProblemsSolve and record division using known facts and sharing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems.
37Lines and anglesDescribing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
38ExamExam – Year 3 – Level 1
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 4 Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 4
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2ReasoningSimple addition up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences that show numbers adding up to another number.
3ReasoningSimple addition up to the number 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences and also write addition in a vertical format using numbers up to 20.
4CalculationsSubtraction up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences up to the number 10.
5CalculationsSubtraction by Comparison
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods.
6CalculationsSubtraction up to the number 20 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences.
7Calculation-groupingMultiplication using equal groups
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows and will understand how to count them.
8Calculation-groupingMultiplication using repeated addition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows using another method and also learn different ways to count them.
9Calculation-multiplicationThe multiplication sign
Objective: on completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply single numbers to solve multiplication problems.
10CalculationsThe numbers 20 to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify, name and add groups of ten, counting to ninety-nine.
11MultiplicationMultiplication – important facts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences.
12LengthCompare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
13LengthUsing the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
14LengthUsing the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
15LengthRead and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
16LengthCompare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
17Weight/massIntroducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
18Weight/massThe kilogram
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales.
19Calculation 10-100Counting by 1, 2, 5, and 10 to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to skip count to one hundred and show that one hundred equals ten times ten.
20Calculation-larger numbersThe numbers 100 to 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
21AdditionAddition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
22SubtractionSubtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
23SubtractionSubtraction with borrowing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method
24Calculation sharing/divisionStrategies for division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to share objects equally and will also learn how to write about them.
25ProblemsSolve and record division using known facts and sharing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems.
26FractionsUsing fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
27FractionsUsing fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
28FractionsComparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
29Fractionsmixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one.
30FractionsImproper fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally.
31FractionsFractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100.
32FractionsFinding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
33DecimalsIntroduction to decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places.
34DecimalsComparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places.
35DecimalsDecimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals.
36AreaComparing and ordering areas.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and compare the area of shapes using a standard unit and order shapes according to their area.
37VolumeIntroduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo
38CapacityUsing the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
39CapacityUsing the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
40CapacityThe relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
41AdditionAddition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
42SubtractionSubtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
43Time, monthsMonths and seasons of the year
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and order the months of the year, know the number of days in each month, name the seasons in order, and know the number of months in each season.
44Time, minutesAnalogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock.
45Time, digitalO’clock and half past using digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock.
46Time, analogueO’clock and half past on the analogue clock
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock.
47Time, quarter to, pastQuarter past and quarter to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’.
48Time, minutes past the hourMinutes past
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock.
49Time, minutes to the hourMinutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
50Time, digital, analogueComparing analogue and digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks.
51Time, unitsUnits of time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units of time and read and interpret simple timetables, timelines and calendars.
52DataPictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
53DataBar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
54DataLine graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
55StatisticsFrequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
562-D shapesSpatial properties of quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals.
57AnglesMeasure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
58Tessellating 2-D shapesUse grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
593-D shapesRecognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties.
603-D shapesRecognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
613-D shapesRecognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
623-D shapesViewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
63Lines and anglesDescribing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
643-D shapesConstructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
65ExamExam – Year 4 – Level 2
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 5 Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 5
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2Calculation-larger numbersThe numbers 100 to 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
3AdditionAddition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
4SubtractionSubtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
5SubtractionSubtraction with borrowing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method
6SubtractionSubtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct.
7Calculation-groupingMultiplication using equal groups
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows and will understand how to count them.
8Calculation-groupingMultiplication using repeated addition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows using another method and also learn different ways to count them.
9MultiplicationMultiplication – important facts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences.
10MultiplicationMultiplying 2-digit numbers by multiple of 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any multiple of 10 using the process of long multiplication.
11LengthUsing the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
12LengthUsing the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
13LengthRead and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
14LengthCompare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
15MultiplicationMultiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
16ProblemsSolve and record division using known facts and sharing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems.
17DivisionDivision with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
18DivisionDividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
19Place valueThe numbers 1000 to 9999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
20FractionsUsing fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
21FractionsUsing fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
22FractionsComparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
23Fractionsmixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one.
24FractionsImproper fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally.
25FractionsFractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100.
26FractionsFinding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
27DecimalsIntroduction to decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places.
28DecimalsComparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places.
29DecimalsDecimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals.
30DecimalsAdding decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
31DecimalsSubtracting decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
32DecimalsUsing decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
33DecimalsUsing decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
34DecimalsRounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
35Measurement – Advanced areaComparing and Ordering Areas
Objective: To estimate size order and count or estimate area as the number of cm squares
36AreaIntroduction to the square centimetre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly.
37VolumeIntroduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo
38Weight/massIntroducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
39Weight/massThe kilogram
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales.
40AdditionAddition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
41SubtractionSubtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
42CapacityUsing the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
43CapacityUsing the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
44CapacityThe relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
45CapacityConverting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
46CapacityEstimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
47Time, minutesAnalogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock.
48Time, quarter to, pastQuarter past and quarter to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’.
49Time, minutes past the hourMinutes past
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock.
50Time, minutes to the hourMinutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
51Time, digital, analogueComparing analogue and digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks.
52Time, unitsUnits of time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units of time and read and interpret simple timetables, timelines and calendars.
53Time, a.m. p.m.AM and PM time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time.
54DataPictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
55DataBar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
56DataLine graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
572-D shapesUsing the prefix to determine polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides.
582-D shapesSpatial properties of quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals.
59AnglesMeasure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
602-D shapesRecognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
61Tessellating 2-D shapesUse grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
623-D shapesRecognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties.
633-D shapesRecognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
643-D shapesRecognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
653-D shapesViewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
66Lines and anglesDescribing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
67ExamExam – Year 5 – Level 2
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 6 Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 6
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2AdditionAddition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
3SubtractionSubtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
4Counting and numerationThe numbers 10 000 to 99 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers.
5Counting and numerationAddition to 9999 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems.
6SubtractionSubtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers.
7Counting and numerationSeven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
8MultiplicationMultiplication using extended algorithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms.
9MultiplicationMultiplication by 2 and 3 digits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form.
10DivisionDivision with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
11DivisionDividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
12DivisionDivide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction.
13MultiplicationMultiplying 2-digit numbers by multiple of 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any multiple of 10 using the process of long multiplication.
14MultiplicationMultiplying 3 and 4-digit numbers by multiples of 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 3 or 4 digit numbers by any multiple of 100 using long multiplication.
15MultiplicationMultiplying 2-digit numbers by 2-digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any other 2 digit number.
16Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction with divisors less than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20.
17Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 and no remainders.
18Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction by multiples of 2, 3 and 4 with divisors greater than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 2,3,4 where divisors are greater than 20 and there are no remainders.
19Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2 and 3 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2,3 where the divisors are less than 20 and there are remainders.
20Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 where the divisors are greater than 12 and less than 20, and the dividend is any 3 digit number, and there are remainders.
21Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 with remainders as fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 and remainders expressed as fractions
22Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction with divisors less than 35 with some remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35, with some remainders.
23Fractionsmixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one.
24FractionsImproper fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally.
25FractionsFractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100.
26FractionsFinding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
27FractionsMultiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form.
28FractionsReducing fractions to lowest equivalent form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor.
29FractionsComparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one.
30LengthCompare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
31LengthUsing the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
32LengthUsing the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
33LengthRead and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
34LengthCompare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
35DecimalsDecimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals.
36DecimalsAdding decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
37DecimalsSubtracting decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
38DecimalsUsing decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
39DecimalsUsing decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
40DecimalsRounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
41DecimalsDecimals to three decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express thousandths as a decimal and interpret decimal notation for thousandths.
42DecimalsAdding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
43DecimalsSubtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
44DecimalsMultiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
45DecimalsMultiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
46DecimalsMultiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
47DecimalsDividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
48DecimalsDividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
49DecimalsDividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
50PercentagesIntroduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
51PercentagesChanging fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
52Measurement – Advanced areaComparing and Ordering Areas
Objective: To estimate size order and count or estimate area as the number of cm squares
53AreaIntroduction to the square centimetre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly.
54AreaIntroducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
55VolumeIntroduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo
563-D shapesConstructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
57VolumeUsing the cubic centimetre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the relationship between the length, breadth, height and volume of a rectangular prism, calculate the volume of rectangular prisms, and find the volume of rectangular prisms by counting.
58CapacityUsing the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
59CapacityUsing the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
60CapacityThe relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
61CapacityConverting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
62CapacityEstimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
63CapacityConverting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
64Weight/massIntroducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
65Weight/massThe kilogram
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales.
66Weight/massThe gram and net mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams.
67Weight/massThe tonne – converting units and problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to: choose the correct unit to measure the mass of small, medium or large objects, and convert measurements from one unit to another.
68Time, a.m. p.m.AM and PM time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time.
69Time, 24-hour24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
702-D shapesUsing the prefix to determine polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides.
712-D shapesSpatial properties of quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals.
72AnglesMeasure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
732-D shapesRecognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
74Tessellating 2-D shapesUse grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
75SpaceRecognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: To name prisms according to the shape of the base
763-D shapesRecognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
773-D shapesRecognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
783-D shapesViewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
79Lines and anglesMapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
80DataPictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
81Graphs – BasicColumn Graphs
Objective: To read and interpret column graphs
82DataLine graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
83DataPie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
84StatisticsFrequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
85Sign word problemsSolving Word Problems by recognising Sign Words
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems by recognising Sign Words that identify which operation to use: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division.
86EquationsProblem solving strategies
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems.
87Number problemsProblems with numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy.
88Time, distance, speedAverage speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
89ExamExam – Year 6 – Level 3
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 7 Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 7
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2AdditionAddition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
3SubtractionSubtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
4Counting and numerationThe numbers 10 000 to 99 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers.
5Counting and numerationAddition to 9999 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems.
6SubtractionSubtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers.
7Counting and numerationSeven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
8MultiplicationMultiplication using extended algorithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms.
9MultiplicationMultiplication by 2 and 3 digits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form.
10DivisionDivision with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
11DivisionDividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
12DivisionDivide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction.
13MultiplicationMultiplying 2-digit numbers by multiple of 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any multiple of 10 using the process of long multiplication.
14MultiplicationMultiplying 3 and 4-digit numbers by multiples of 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 3 or 4 digit numbers by any multiple of 100 using long multiplication.
15MultiplicationMultiplying 2-digit numbers by 2-digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any other 2 digit number.
16Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction by multiples of 2, 3 and 4 with divisors greater than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 2,3,4 where divisors are greater than 20 and there are no remainders.
17Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2 and 3 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2,3 where the divisors are less than 20 and there are remainders.
18Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 where the divisors are greater than 12 and less than 20, and the dividend is any 3 digit number, and there are remainders.
19Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 with remainders as fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 and remainders expressed as fractions
20Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction with divisors less than 35 with some remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35, with some remainders.
21Division/repeat subtractionUsing divide, multiply and subtraction in the bring down method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use Long Division using the Divide, Multiply, Subtract and Bring Down method.
22FractionsMultiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form.
23FractionsReducing fractions to lowest equivalent form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor.
24FractionsComparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one.
25FractionsSubtracting fractions from whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from
26FractionsAdding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: To add and subtract fractions with the same denominator
27FractionsAdding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
28FractionsMultiplying fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers.
29FractionsFractions of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection.
30FractionsMultiplying fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
31FractionsMultiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
32FractionsFinding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
33DecimalsRounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
34DecimalsDecimals to three decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express thousandths as a decimal and interpret decimal notation for thousandths.
35DecimalsAdding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
36DecimalsSubtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
37DecimalsMultiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
38DecimalsMultiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
39DecimalsMultiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
40DecimalsDividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
41DecimalsDividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
42DecimalsDividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
43PercentagesIntroduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
44PercentagesChanging fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
45PercentagesChanging percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
46PercentagesOne quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
47LengthUsing the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
48LengthUsing the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
49Measurement – LengthRead and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: To read distances (km) from a map and calculate total distances between locations
50LengthCompare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
51AreaIntroducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
52AreaFinding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
53AreaLarger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
54VolumeIntroduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo
553-D shapesConstructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
56VolumeUsing the cubic centimetre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the relationship between the length, breadth, height and volume of a rectangular prism, calculate the volume of rectangular prisms, and find the volume of rectangular prisms by counting.
57CapacityUsing the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
58CapacityUsing the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
59VolumeSolving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
60VolumeSolving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
61CapacityConverting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
62Weight/massThe gram and net mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams.
63Weight/massThe tonne – converting units and problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to: choose the correct unit to measure the mass of small, medium or large objects, and convert measurements from one unit to another.
64CapacityThe relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
65CapacityConverting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
66CapacityEstimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
672-D shapesUsing the prefix to determine polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides.
682-D shapesSpatial properties of quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals.
69AnglesMeasure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
702-D shapesRecognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
71Geometry-anglesMeasuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
72Tessellating 2-D shapesUse grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
73SpaceRecognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: To name prisms according to the shape of the base
743-D shapesRecognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
753-D shapesRecognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
763-D shapesViewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
77Time, a.m. p.m.AM and PM time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time.
78Time, 24-hour24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
79Time zonesTime zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
80Time, distance, speedAverage speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
81Lines and anglesMapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
82Lines and anglesInformal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
83DataPictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
84Graphs – BasicColumn Graphs
Objective: To read and interpret column graphs
85DataLine graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
86DataPie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
87StatisticsFrequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
88StatisticsThe range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
89Statistic-probabilityThe mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
90Statistic-probabilityThe mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
91Statistic-probabilityThe median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
92Statistic-probabilityProbability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
93Statistic-probabilityExperimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
94Sign word problemsSolving Word Problems by recognising Sign Words
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems by recognising Sign Words that identify which operation to use: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division.
95EquationsProblem solving strategies
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems.
96Number problemsProblems with numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy.
97MoneyProblems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
98LengthProblems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
99MassProblems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
100AreaProblems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
101Algebraic expressionsAlgebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
102Algebraic expressionsSubstitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
103Algebraic expressionsDirected numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
104Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
105Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
106Algebraic expressionsSimplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
107Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
108Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
109Algebraic expressionsExpanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
110Algebraic expressionsExpanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
111Algebraic expressionsExpanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
112ExamExam – Year 7 – Level 4
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 8 Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 8
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2AdditionAddition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
3SubtractionSubtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
4Counting and numerationThe numbers 10 000 to 99 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers.
5Counting and numerationAddition to 9999 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems.
6Basic mathematics part 2Subtraction involving four-digit numbers and beyond
Objective: To subtract 4 or 5-digit numbers from 5-digit numbers using the Renaming Method
7MultiplicationMultiplication – important facts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences.
8DivisionDivision with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
9DivisionDividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
10Counting and numerationSeven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
11MultiplicationMultiplication by 2 and 3 digits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form.
12DivisionDivide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction.
13LengthUsing the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
14LengthUsing the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
15Measurement – LengthRead and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: To read distances (km) from a map and calculate total distances between locations
16LengthCompare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
17LengthProblems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
18AreaIntroduction to the square centimetre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly.
19AreaIntroducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
20AreaFinding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
21AreaLarger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
22AreaProblems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
23VolumeIntroduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo
243-D shapesConstructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
25VolumeUsing the cubic centimetre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the relationship between the length, breadth, height and volume of a rectangular prism, calculate the volume of rectangular prisms, and find the volume of rectangular prisms by counting.
26VolumeIntroducing the formula for volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula.
27CapacityUsing the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
28CapacityUsing the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
29CapacityThe relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
30CapacityConverting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
31CapacityEstimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
32CapacityConverting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
33Volume/capacityProblems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
34VolumeFinding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
35MultiplicationMultiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
36FractionsSubtracting fractions from whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from
37FractionsAdding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: To add and subtract fractions with the same denominator
38FractionsAdding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
39FractionsMultiplying fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers.
40FractionsFractions of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection.
41FractionsMultiplying fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
42FractionsMultiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
43FractionsFinding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
44FractionsDividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
45FractionsDividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
46Rules propertiesUsing Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
47DecimalsRounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
48DecimalsAdding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
49DecimalsSubtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
50DecimalsMultiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
51DecimalsMultiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
52DecimalsMultiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
53DecimalsDividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
54DecimalsDividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
55DecimalsDividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
56PercentagesChanging fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
57PercentagesChanging percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
58PercentagesOne quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
59Rules for indices/exponentsAdding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
60Indices/ExponentsSubtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: To subtract indices when dividing powers of the same base
61Rules for indices/exponentsMultiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
62Rules for indices/exponentsMultiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
63Rules for indices/exponentsTerms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
64SurdsIntroducing surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and know the properties of surds as irrational numbers and be able to distinguish them from rational numbers.
65Graphs – BasicColumn Graphs
Objective: To read and interpret column graphs
66DataLine graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
67DataPie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
68StatisticsFrequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
69StatisticsFrequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
70Statistics part 1Relative Frequency
Objective: To extend the frequency distribution table to include a relative frequency column
71StatisticsThe range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
72Statistic-probabilityThe mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
73Statistic-probabilityThe mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
74Statistic-probabilityThe median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
75StatisticsStem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
76Statistic-probabilityProbability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
77Statistic-probabilityExperimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
78Statistic-probabilityRolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
79Statistic-probabilityTree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
80Statistic-probabilityTree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
81Time, 24-hour24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
82Time, distance, speedAverage speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
83Time zonesTime zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
84AreaArea of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
85VolumeSolving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
86VolumeSolving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
87Weight/massThe gram and net mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams.
88Weight/massThe tonne – converting units and problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to: choose the correct unit to measure the mass of small, medium or large objects, and convert measurements from one unit to another.
89Tessellating 2-D shapesUse grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
90SpaceRecognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: To name prisms according to the shape of the base
913-D shapesRecognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
923-D shapesRecognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
933-D shapesViewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
94Lines and anglesMapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
95Geometry-anglesMeasuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
96Geometry-anglesAdjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
97Geometry-anglesComplementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
98Geometry-anglesVertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
99Geometry-anglesAngles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
100Geometry-trianglesAngle sum of a triangle
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems.
101Geometry-trianglesExterior angle theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the exterior angle of a triangle theorem to solve geometric questions.
102Special trianglesSpecial triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify an equilateral and an isosceles triangle and solve geometry questions involving these triangles.
103Geometry-quadrilateralsQuadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to find missing angles by using the fact that a quadrilateral’s angle sum is 360 degrees.
104Geometry part 1Geometric Constructions
Objective: To bisect a line, bisect an angle and construct a perpendicular using a compass and ruler
105GeometryTo identify collinear points, coplanar lines and points in 2 and 3 dimensions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use correct terms to describe points, lines, intervals and rays.
106Geometry part 3Angles
Objective: To label and classify angles and calculate pronumeral values within angles
107Geometry-constructionsAngle bisector construction and its properties (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to bisect an angle using a pair of compasses and a straight edge.
108Geometry part 2Congruent triangles: Tests 1 and 2
Objective: To recognise congruent triangles and matching sides and angles using SSS and SAS
109Geometry-congruenceCongruent triangles, Test 3 and 4
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent.
110Geometry-congruenceProofs and congruent triangles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to set out a formal proof to show that two triangles are congruent.
111Similar trianglesSimilar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
112Algebraic expressionsAlgebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
113Algebraic expressionsSubstitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
114Algebraic expressionsDirected numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
115Algebraic expressionsDirected numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
116Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
117Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
118Algebraic expressionsSimplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
119Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
120Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
121Algebraic expressionsExpanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
122Algebraic expressionsExpanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
123Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
124Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
125Algebra – BasicSolving Two-Step Equations
Objective: To solve two-step equations without division in the initial problem
126Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
127Algebraic equationsEquations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
128Algebraic equationsEquations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
129Algebra- formulaeEquations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
130Algebra – BasicChanging the Subject of the Formula
Objective: To change the subject of algebraic formulae using equation-solving techniques
131ExamExam – Year 8 – Level 5: Maths A
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 9 leading to A Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 9
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2AdditionAddition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
3SubtractionSubtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
4Counting and numerationThe numbers 10 000 to 99 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers.
5Counting and numerationAddition to 9999 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems.
6Basic mathematics part 2Subtraction involving four-digit numbers and beyond
Objective: To subtract 4 or 5-digit numbers from 5-digit numbers using the Renaming Method
7MultiplicationMultiplication – important facts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences.
8DivisionDivision with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
9DivisionDividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
10Counting and numerationSeven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
11MultiplicationMultiplication by 2 and 3 digits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form.
12DivisionDivide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction.
13LengthUsing the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
14LengthUsing the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
15Measurement – LengthRead and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: To read distances (km) from a map and calculate total distances between locations
16LengthCompare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
17LengthProblems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
18AreaIntroduction to the square centimetre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly.
19AreaIntroducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
20AreaFinding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
21AreaLarger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
22AreaArea of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
23AreaArea of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
24AreaArea of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
25AreaArea of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
26AreaProblems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
27VolumeIntroducing the formula for volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula.
28Volume/capacityProblems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
293-D shapesViewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
30VolumeFinding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
31MultiplicationMultiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
32FractionsFinding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
33FractionsMultiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form.
34FractionsReducing fractions to lowest equivalent form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor.
35FractionsComparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one.
36FractionsSubtracting fractions from whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from
37FractionsAdding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: To add and subtract fractions with the same denominator
38FractionsAdding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
39FractionsMultiplying fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers.
40FractionsFractions of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection.
41FractionsMultiplying fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
42FractionsMultiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
43FractionsFinding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
44FractionsDividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
45FractionsDividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
46Rules propertiesUsing Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
47DecimalsAdding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
48DecimalsSubtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: To subtract decimals with a different number of decimal places
49DecimalsMultiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
50DecimalsMultiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
51DecimalsMultiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
52DecimalsDividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
53DecimalsDividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
54DecimalsDividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
55PercentagesIntroduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
56PercentagesChanging fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
57PercentagesChanging percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
58PercentagesOne quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
59PercentagesCalculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
60Algebraic expressionsAlgebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
61Algebraic expressionsSubstitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
62Algebraic expressionsDirected numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
63Algebraic expressionsDirected numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
64Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
65Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
66Algebraic expressionsSimplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
67Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
68Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
69Time, 24-hour24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
70Time, distance, speedAverage speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
71Time zonesTime zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
72Lines and anglesMapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
73Geometry-anglesMeasuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
74Geometry-anglesAdjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
75Geometry-anglesComplementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
76Geometry-anglesVertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
77Geometry-anglesAngles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
78Lines and anglesMain and intermediate compass points
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use main and intermediate compass points to specify location.
79Trigonometry-compassBearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
80Algebraic expressionsExpanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
81Algebraic expressionsExpanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
82Algebraic expressionsExpanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
83Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
84Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
85Algebraic equationsSolving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
86Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
87Algebraic equationsEquations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
88Algebraic equationsEquations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
89Algebra- formulaeEquations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
90Statistic-probabilityProbability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
91Statistic-probabilityRolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
92Statistic-probabilityExperimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
93StatisticsFrequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
94StatisticsFrequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
95StatisticsRelative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
96StatisticsThe range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
97Statistic-probabilityThe mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
98Statistic-probabilityThe mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
99Statistic-probabilityThe median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
100Statistic-probabilityCumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
101Statistic-probabilityCalculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
102Statistics – grouped dataCalculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
103Statistics using a calculatorStatistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
104Statistics – Range and dispersionRange as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
105Similar trianglesSimilar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
106Similar trianglesUsing similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
107Overlapping trianglesExamples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
108Geometry-quadrilateralsClassifying Quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand the properties that classify quadrilaterals.
109Geometry-quadrilateralsUsing the Properties of a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use and prove the properties of a parallelogram.
110Geometry-quadrilateralsProving a Shape is a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use properties to prove a given quadrilateral is a parallelogram.
111Geometry-quadrilateralsProperties of the Rectangle, Square and Rhombus
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the rectangle, square and rhombus for formal proofs and to find values.
112Geometry-quadrilateralsProperties of the Trapezium and Kite
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the trapezium and kite for formal proofs and to find values.
113Geometry-quadrilateralsThe quadrilateral family and coordinate methods in geometry
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will know the relationships between quadrilaterals and use coordinate methods to prove some of the properties.
114Algebraic fractionsSimplifying algebraic fractions using the index laws.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify most algebraic fractions using different methodologies.
115Algebra-negative indicesAlgebraic fractions resulting in negative indices.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand how to simplify an algebraic fractional expression with a negative index, and also how to write such an expression without a negative index.
116Rules for indices/exponentsAdding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
117Rules for indices/exponentsSubtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base.
118Rules for indices/exponentsMultiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
119Rules for indices/exponentsMultiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
120Rules for indices/exponentsTerms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
121Rules for indices/exponentsNegative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
122Scientific notationScientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
123Scientific notationScientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
124Scientific notationChanging scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
125ExamExam – Year 9 – Level 5: Maths A
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 9 leading to B and C Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 9
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2LengthUsing the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
3LengthUsing the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
4Measurement – LengthRead and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: To read distances (km) from a map and calculate total distances between locations
5LengthCompare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
6LengthProblems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
7AreaIntroducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
8AreaFinding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
9AreaLarger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
10AreaArea of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
11AreaArea of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
12AreaArea of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
13AreaArea of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
14AreaProblems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
15VolumeIntroducing the formula for volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula.
16Volume/capacityProblems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
173-D shapesViewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
18VolumeFinding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
19MultiplicationMultiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
20FractionsFinding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
21FractionsMultiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form.
22FractionsReducing fractions to lowest equivalent form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor.
23FractionsComparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one.
24FractionsSubtracting fractions from whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from
25FractionsAdding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: To add and subtract fractions with the same denominator
26FractionsAdding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
27FractionsMultiplying fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers.
28FractionsFractions of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection.
29FractionsMultiplying fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
30FractionsMultiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
31FractionsFinding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
32FractionsDividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
33FractionsDividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
34FractionsBODMAS
Objective: To calculate answers for fraction and mixed number questions using BODMAS
35DecimalsAdding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
36DecimalsSubtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
37DecimalsMultiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
38DecimalsMultiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
39DecimalsMultiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
40DecimalsDividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
41DecimalsDividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
42DecimalsDividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
43PercentagesIntroduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
44PercentagesChanging fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
45PercentagesChanging percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
46PercentagesOne quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
47PercentagesCalculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
48Algebraic expressionsAlgebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
49Algebraic expressionsSubstitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
50Algebraic expressionsDirected numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
51Algebraic expressionsDirected numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
52Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
53Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
54Algebraic expressionsSimplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
55Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
56Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
57Time, 24-hour24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
58Time, distance, speedAverage speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
59Time zonesTime zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
60Lines and anglesMapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
61Geometry-anglesMeasuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
62Geometry-anglesAdjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
63Geometry-anglesComplementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
64Geometry-anglesVertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
65Geometry-anglesAngles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
66Geometry-anglesParallel Lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles.
67Geometry-problemsAdditional questions involving parallel lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them.
68Geometry-trianglesAngle sum of a triangle
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems.
69Geometry-trianglesExterior angle theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the exterior angle of a triangle theorem to solve geometric questions.
70Special trianglesSpecial triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify an equilateral and an isosceles triangle and solve geometry questions involving these triangles.
71Geometry-quadrilateralsQuadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to find missing angles by using the fact that a quadrilateral’s angle sum is 360 degrees.
72Geometry-constructionsGeometric constructions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able complete constructions with a ruler and a pair of compasses.
73GeometryTo identify collinear points, coplanar lines and points in 2 and 3 dimensions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use correct terms to describe points, lines, intervals and rays.
74Geometry – anglesTo determine angle labelling rules, naming angles according to size, angle bisector properties and related algebra
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will label angles, use a protractor and perform calculations using algebra involving angles.
75Geometry-constructionsAngle bisector construction and its properties (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to bisect an angle using a pair of compasses and a straight edge.
76Geometry part 2Congruent triangles: Tests 1 and 2
Objective: To recognise congruent triangles and matching sides and angles using SSS and SAS
77Geometry-congruenceCongruent triangles, Test 3 and 4
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent.
78Geometry-congruenceProofs and congruent triangles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to set out a formal proof to show that two triangles are congruent.
79Similar trianglesSimilar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
80Geometry part 2Using Similar Triangles to Calculate Lengths
Objective: To determine unknown sides and angles of similar triangles
81Overlapping trianglesExamples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
82PythagorasFind the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
83PythagorasPythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
84PythagorasFind the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
85PythagorasCalculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
86Trigonometry-ratiosTrigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
87Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
88Trigonometry part 1Using the Trigonometric Ratios to find unknown length [Case 1 Sin]
Objective: To use the sine ratio to calculate the opposite side of a right-angled triangle
89Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
90Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
91Trigonometry-ratiosUnknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
92Algebraic expressionsExpanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
93Algebraic expressionsExpanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
94Algebraic expressionsExpanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
95Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
96Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
97Algebraic equationsSolving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
98Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
99Algebraic equationsEquations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
100Algebraic equationsEquations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
101Algebra- formulaeEquations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
102Algebra- formulaeChanging the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
103Statistic-probabilityProbability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
104Statistic-probabilityRolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
105Statistic-probabilityExperimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
106Statistic-probabilityTree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
107Statistic-probabilityTree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
108StatisticsFrequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
109StatisticsFrequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
110StatisticsRelative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
111StatisticsThe range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
112Statistic-probabilityBinomial Theorem – Pascal’s Triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use Pascal’s triangle and the binomial theorem to write the expansion of binomial expressions raised to integer powers.
113Statistic-probabilityBinomial probabilities using the Binomial Theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve certain types of probability questions using the binomial theorem
114Statistic-probabilityCounting techniques and ordered selections – permutations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be competent in using some new counting techniques used for solving probability.
115StatisticsStem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
116Geometry-quadrilateralsClassifying Quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand the properties that classify quadrilaterals.
117Geometry-quadrilateralsUsing the Properties of a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use and prove the properties of a parallelogram.
118Geometry-quadrilateralsProving a Shape is a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use properties to prove a given quadrilateral is a parallelogram.
119Geometry-quadrilateralsProperties of the Rectangle, Square and Rhombus
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the rectangle, square and rhombus for formal proofs and to find values.
120Geometry-quadrilateralsProperties of the Trapezium and Kite
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the trapezium and kite for formal proofs and to find values.
121QuadrilateralsQuadrilaterals 6
Objective: To establish the properties of quadrilaterals in the number plane
122Rules for indices/exponentsAdding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
123Rules for indices/exponentsSubtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base.
124Rules for indices/exponentsMultiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
125Rules for indices/exponentsMultiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
126Rules for indices/exponentsTerms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
127Rules for indices/exponentsNegative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
128Fractional indices/exponentsFractional indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices.
129Scientific notationScientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
130Scientific notationScientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
131Scientific notationChanging scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
132SurdsIntroducing surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and know the properties of surds as irrational numbers and be able to distinguish them from rational numbers.
133Algebra-factorisingSimplifying easy algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to simplify algebraic fractions by factorising.
134Algebraic fractionsSimplifying algebraic fractions using the index laws.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify most algebraic fractions using different methodologies.
135Algebra-negative indicesAlgebraic fractions resulting in negative indices.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand how to simplify an algebraic fractional expression with a negative index, and also how to write such an expression without a negative index.
136FactorisationFactorisation of algebraic fractions including binomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to simplify more complex algebraic fractions using a variety of methods.
137Algebraic fractions-binomialCancelling binomial factors in algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to factorise binomials to simplify fractions.
138Simultaneous equnsSimultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
139Simultaneous equnsElimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
140Simultaneous equnsElimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
141Simultaneous equnsApplications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
142Coordinate geometrySolve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
143ExamExam – Year 9 – Level 5: Maths B & C
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 10 leading to A Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 10
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2SubtractionSubtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct.
3MultiplicationMultiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
4Place valueThe numbers 1000 to 9999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
5AdditionAddition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
6SubtractionSubtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
7MultiplicationMultiplication using extended algorithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms.
8DivisionDivision with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
9DivisionDividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
10Counting and numerationThe numbers 10 000 to 99 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers.
11Counting and numerationAddition to 9999 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems.
12SubtractionSubtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers.
13Counting and numerationSeven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
14FractionsUsing fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
15FractionsUsing fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
16FractionsComparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
17Fractionsmixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one.
18FractionsImproper fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally.
19FractionsFractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100.
20FractionsFinding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
21FractionsMultiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form.
22FractionsReducing fractions to lowest equivalent form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor.
23FractionsComparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one.
24FractionsSubtracting fractions from whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from
25FractionsAdding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions with the same denominator.
26FractionsAdding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
27FractionsMultiplying fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers.
28FractionsFractions of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection.
29FractionsMultiplying fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
30FractionsMultiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
31FractionsFinding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
32FractionsDividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
33FractionsDividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
34Rules propertiesUsing Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
35PercentagesCalculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
36MultiplicationMultiplying 2-digit numbers by 2-digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any other 2 digit number.
37MultiplicationMultiplying 4-digit numbers by 3-digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 4 digit numbers by any 3 digit numbers using long multiplication.
38MultiplicationMultiplying 4-digit numbers by 4-digit number
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to be able to multiply any 4 digit number by any other 4 digit number using long multiplication.
39Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction with divisors less than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20.
40Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 and no remainders.
41Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction by multiples of 2, 3 and 4 with divisors greater than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 2,3,4 where divisors are greater than 20 and there are no remainders.
42Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2 and 3 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2,3 where the divisors are less than 20 and there are remainders.
43Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 where the divisors are greater than 12 and less than 20, and the dividend is any 3 digit number, and there are remainders.
44Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 with remainders as fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 and remainders expressed as fractions
45Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction with divisors less than 35 with some remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35, with some remainders.
46Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction with divisors less than 55 with dividends of 3 and 4-digits with some remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 55 and where dividends are 3 and 4 digit numbers, and there are some remainders.
47Division/repeat subtractionRepeated subtraction with divisors greater than 50 with dividends of thousands and some remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to use Long Division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 50 including division of thousands, and some remainders.
48Division/repeat subtractionUsing divide, multiply and subtraction in the bring down method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use Long Division using the Divide, Multiply, Subtract and Bring Down method.
49Sign word problemsSolving Word Problems by recognising Sign Words
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems by recognising Sign Words that identify which operation to use: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division.
50EquationsProblem solving strategies
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems.
51Number problemsProblems with numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy.
52MoneyProblems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
53LengthProblems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
54MassProblems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
55AreaProblems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
56Volume/capacityProblems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
57DecimalsIntroduction to decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places.
58DecimalsComparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places.
59DecimalsDecimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals.
60DecimalsAdding decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
61DecimalsSubtracting decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
62DecimalsUsing decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
63DecimalsUsing decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
64DecimalsRounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
65DecimalsDecimals to three decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express thousandths as a decimal and interpret decimal notation for thousandths.
66DecimalsAdding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
67DecimalsSubtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
68DecimalsMultiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
69DecimalsMultiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
70DecimalsMultiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
71DecimalsDividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
72DecimalsDividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
73DecimalsDividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
74PercentagesIntroduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
75PercentagesChanging fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
76PercentagesChanging percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
77PercentagesOne quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
78Scientific notationScientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
79Scientific notationScientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
80Scientific notationChanging scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
81Significant figuresSignificant figures
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures.
82Algebraic expressionsAlgebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
83Algebraic expressionsSubstitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
84Algebraic expressionsDirected numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
85Algebraic expressionsDirected numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
86Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
87Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
88Algebraic expressionsSimplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
89Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
90Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
91Algebraic expressionsExpanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
92Algebraic expressionsExpanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
93Algebraic expressionsExpanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
94Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
95Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
96Algebraic equationsSolving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
97Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
98Algebraic equationsEquations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
99Algebraic equationsEquations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
100Algebra- formulaeEquations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
101Algebra- formulaeChanging the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
102Absolute value or modulusSolving for the variable
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations involving a single absolute value.
103VolumeUsing the cubic centimetre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the relationship between the length, breadth, height and volume of a rectangular prism, calculate the volume of rectangular prisms, and find the volume of rectangular prisms by counting.
104VolumeIntroducing the formula for volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula.
105VolumeUsing the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
106VolumeSolving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
107VolumeSolving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
108CapacityConverting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
109AreaArea of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
110AreaArea of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
111AreaArea of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
112AreaArea of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
113VolumeFinding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
114VolumeComposite solids.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: dissect composite solids into simpler shapes so that the volume can be calculated, calculate the volume of a variety of composite solids, and use formulae appropriately.
115Time, 24-hour24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
116Time zonesTime zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
117Time, distance, speedAverage speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
1183-D shapesRecognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties.
1193-D shapesRecognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
1203-D shapesRecognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
121Surface areaSurface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
122Surface areaSurface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
123StatisticsFrequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
124StatisticsFrequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
125StatisticsRelative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
126StatisticsThe range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
127Statistic-probabilityThe mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
128Statistic-probabilityThe mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
129Statistic-probabilityThe median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
130Statistic-probabilityCumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
131Statistic-probabilityCalculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
132Statistic-probabilityRolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
133Statistic-probabilityExperimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
134Statistics – grouped dataCalculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
135Statistics using a calculatorStatistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
136Statistics – Range and dispersionRange as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
137Statistics – SpreadMeasures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
138Statistics – Standard deviationStandard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
139Statistics – Standard deviationNormal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
140Statistics – Interquartile rangeMeasures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
141StatisticsStem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
142StatisticsScatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
143Statistic-probabilityTree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
144Statistic-probabilityTree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
145Statistic-probabilityThe complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
146Statistic-probabilityP[A or B] When A and B are both mutually and NOT mutually exclusive
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to distinguish between mutually exclusive and non mutually exclusive events and be able to find the probabilities of both.
147ExamExam – Year 10 – Level 6: Maths A
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 10 leading to B and C Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 10
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2Measurement – LengthRead and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: To read distances (km) from a map and calculate total distances between locations
3LengthCompare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
4LengthProblems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
5AreaIntroducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
6AreaFinding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
7AreaLarger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
8AreaArea of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
9AreaArea of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
10AreaArea of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
11AreaArea of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
12AreaProblems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
13Surface areaSurface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
14Surface areaSurface Area of a Triangular/Trapezoidal Prism
Objective: To calculate the surface area of triangular and trapezoidal prisms
15Surface areaSurface area of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
16Surface areaSurface area of pyramids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of pyramids.
17Surface areaSurface area of cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of cones by finding the area or the base ‘p r . ‘and the area of the curved surface ‘ p r l’. The student will also be able to find the slant height ‘l’ given the perpendicul
18Surface areaSurface area of composite solids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of Composite solids.
19Volume/capacityProblems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
203-D shapesViewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
21VolumeFinding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
22MassProblems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
23Problem solvingWord Problems with Money
Objective: To solve money word problems using + – x and /
24FractionsAdding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
25FractionsMultiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
26FractionsDividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
27FractionsDividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
28FractionsBODMAS
Objective: To calculate answers for fraction and mixed number questions using BODMAS
29DecimalsMultiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
30DecimalsMultiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
31DecimalsDividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
32DecimalsDividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
33DecimalsDividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
34PercentagesChanging fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
35PercentagesChanging percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
36PercentagesOne quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
37PercentagesCalculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
38Algebraic expressionsDirected numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
39Algebraic expressionsDirected numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
40Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
41Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
42Algebraic expressionsSimplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
43Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
44Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
45Time, 24-hour24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
46Time, distance, speedAverage speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
47Time zonesTime zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
48Geometry-anglesMeasuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
49Geometry-anglesAdjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
50Geometry-anglesComplementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
51Geometry-anglesVertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
52Geometry-anglesAngles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
53Geometry part 1Parallel Lines
Objective: To identify angle pairs and calculate angles formed by a transversal and parallel lines
54Geometry-problemsAdditional questions involving parallel lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them.
55Geometry problemsMore difficult exercises involving parallel lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles in questions that are more difficult than previously completed. Students will also learn to use other geometric properties as well as set out log
56Geometry-trianglesAngle sum of a triangle
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems.
57Geometry-trianglesExterior angle theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the exterior angle of a triangle theorem to solve geometric questions.
58Special trianglesSpecial triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify an equilateral and an isosceles triangle and solve geometry questions involving these triangles.
59Geometry-quadrilateralsQuadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to find missing angles by using the fact that a quadrilateral’s angle sum is 360 degrees.
60Geometry part 1Geometric Constructions
Objective: To bisect a line, bisect an angle and construct a perpendicular using a compass and ruler
61GeometryTo identify collinear points, coplanar lines and points in 2 and 3 dimensions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use correct terms to describe points, lines, intervals and rays.
62Geometry part 3Angles
Objective: To label and classify angles and calculate pronumeral values within angles
63Geometry-constructionsAngle bisector construction and its properties (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to bisect an angle using a pair of compasses and a straight edge.
64Geometry-polygonsAngles of regular polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the angle sum of a polygon formula, and understand that the external angles of a polygon add up to 360 degrees.
65Geometry-congruenceCongruent triangles, Test 1 and 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are congruent.
66Geometry-congruenceCongruent triangles, Test 3 and 4
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent.
67Geometry-congruenceProofs and congruent triangles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to set out a formal proof to show that two triangles are congruent.
68Similar trianglesSimilar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
69Similar trianglesUsing similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
70Overlapping trianglesExamples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
71PythagorasFind the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
72PythagorasPythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
73PythagorasFind the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
74PythagorasCalculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
75Trigonometry-ratiosTrigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
76Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
77Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
78Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
79Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
80Trigonometry-ratiosUnknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
81Trigonometry-compassBearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
82Trigonometry-elevationAngles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
83Trigonometry-practicalTrigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
84Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
85Trigonometry- ratiosUsing the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
86Algebraic expressionsExpanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
87Algebraic expressionsExpanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
88Algebraic expressionsExpanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
89Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
90Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
91Algebraic equationsSolving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
92Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
93Algebraic equationsEquations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
94Algebraic equationsEquations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
95Algebra- formulaeEquations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
96Algebra- formulaeChanging the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
97Algebra-inequalitiesSolving Inequalities.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities.
98Absolute value or modulusSolving for the variable
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations involving a single absolute value.
99Absolute value or modulusSolving and graphing inequalities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve inequalities involving one absolute value.
100Graphs – BasicColumn Graphs
Objective: To read and interpret column graphs
101DataLine graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
102DataPie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
103Statistic-probabilityProbability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
104Statistic-probabilityRolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
105Statistic-probabilityExperimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
106Statistic-probabilityTree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
107Statistic-probabilityTree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
108StatisticsFrequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
109StatisticsFrequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
110Statistics part 1Relative Frequency
Objective: To extend the frequency distribution table to include a relative frequency column
111StatisticsThe range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
112Statistic-probabilityBinomial Theorem – Pascal’s Triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use Pascal’s triangle and the binomial theorem to write the expansion of binomial expressions raised to integer powers.
113Statistic-probabilityBinomial probabilities using the Binomial Theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve certain types of probability questions using the binomial theorem
114Statistic-probabilityCounting techniques and ordered selections – permutations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be competent in using some new counting techniques used for solving probability.
115Statistic-probabilityCumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
116Statistics part 1Calculating the Mean from a Frequency Distribution
Objective: To determine averages (mean, median and mode) from cumulative frequency polygons
117Statistics – grouped dataCalculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
118Co-ordinate Geometry-TheoremsAngles between two lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the angle between given lines and derive the equation of a line given its angle to another line.
119Statistics – Range and dispersionRange as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
120Statistics – SpreadMeasures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
121Statistics – Standard deviationStandard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
122Statistics – Interquartile rangeMeasures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
123StatisticsScatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
124Geometry-quadrilateralsClassifying Quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand the properties that classify quadrilaterals.
125Geometry-quadrilateralsUsing the Properties of a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use and prove the properties of a parallelogram.
126Geometry-quadrilateralsProving a Shape is a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use properties to prove a given quadrilateral is a parallelogram.
127Geometry-quadrilateralsProperties of the Rectangle, Square and Rhombus
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the rectangle, square and rhombus for formal proofs and to find values.
128Geometry-quadrilateralsProperties of the Trapezium and Kite
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the trapezium and kite for formal proofs and to find values.
129Geometry-quadrilateralsThe quadrilateral family and coordinate methods in geometry
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will know the relationships between quadrilaterals and use coordinate methods to prove some of the properties.
130Rules for indices/exponentsAdding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
131Rules for indices/exponentsSubtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base.
132Rules for indices/exponentsMultiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
133Rules for indices/exponentsMultiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
134Rules for indices/exponentsTerms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
135Rules for indices/exponentsNegative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
136Scientific notationScientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
137Scientific notationScientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
138Standard/Scientific notationChanging scientific notation to numerals
Objective: To interpret scientific notation by writing in base 10 numerals
139SurdsIntroducing surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and know the properties of surds as irrational numbers and be able to distinguish them from rational numbers.
140SurdsSome rules for the operations with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for division and multiplication of surds.
141SurdsSimplifying surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for simplifying surds using division and multiplication.
142SurdsCreating entire surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write numbers as entire surds and compare numbers by writing as entire surds
143SurdsAdding and subtracting like surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract surds and simplify expressions by collecting like surds.
144SurdsExpanding surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and then simplify binomial expressions involving surds.
145SurdsBinomial expansions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify the squares of binomial sums and differences involving surds.
146SurdsConjugate binomials with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify conjugate binomial expressions involving surds.
147SurdsRationalising the denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves surds.
148SurdsRationalising binomial denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves binomial expressions.
149Algebra-factorisingSimplifying easy algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to simplify algebraic fractions by factorising.
150Algebraic fractionsSimplifying algebraic fractions using the index laws.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify most algebraic fractions using different methodologies.
151Algebra-negative indicesAlgebraic fractions resulting in negative indices.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand how to simplify an algebraic fractional expression with a negative index, and also how to write such an expression without a negative index.
152FactorisationFactorisation of algebraic fractions including binomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to simplify more complex algebraic fractions using a variety of methods.
153Algebraic fractions-binomialCancelling binomial factors in algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to factorise binomials to simplify fractions.
154Simultaneous equnsSimultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
155Simultaneous equnsElimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
156Simultaneous equnsElimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
157Simultaneous equnsApplications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
158Coordinate geometrySolve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
159Quadratic equationsIntroduction to quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simple quadratic equations.
160Quadratic equationsQuadratic equations with factorisation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find both roots of a quadratic equation by factorising.
161Quadratic equationsSolving quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have gained more confidence in working with quadratic equations.
162Quadratic equationsCompleting the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of completing the square.
163Quadratic equationsSolving quadratic equations by completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the reasoning behind completing the square.
164Quadratic equationsThe quadratic formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with the quadratic formula.
165Quadratic equationsProblem solving with quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express a problem as a quadratic equation and then solve it.
166Quadratic equationsSolving simultaneous quadratic equations graphically
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will better understand why quadratic equations have two solutions and will be capable of solving quadratic equations and problems graphically..
167Coordinate Geometry-the planeDistance formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the distance between any two points on the number plane and interpret the results.
168Coordinate Geometry-midpoint, slopeMid-point formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the mid point formula and use it practically.
169Coordinate Geometry-gradientGradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
170Coordinate Geometry-gradientGradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
171Coordinate Geometry-straight lineThe straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
172Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc.Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
173Coordinate Geometry-equation of lineGeneral form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
174Coordinate Geometry-interceptSlope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
175Coordinate Geometry-point slopePoint slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
176Graphing-polynomialsGraphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
177Rect.hyperbolaThe rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
178Exponential functionThe exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
179Log functionsLogarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
180Conic sectionsThe parabola x. = 4ay
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the focus and directrix for a parabola given in standard form.
181FunctionsDefinition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
182FunctionsNotation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
183FunctionsMore on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
184FunctionsDomain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
185Co-ordinate Geometry-Two point formulaTwo point formula: equation of a line which joins a pair of points.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line given any two named points on the line.
186Co-ordinate Geometry-Intercept formIntercept form of a straight line: find the equation when given x and y
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an effective and efficient method for calculating the equation of a straight line.
187Co-ordinate Geometry-Parallel lines equationsParallel lines: identify equation of a line parallel to another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to decide if two or more lines are parallel or not and to solve problems involving parallel lines.
188Co-ordinate Geometry-Perpendicular linesPerpendicular lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the equation of a line, given that it is perpendicular to another stated line.
189ExamExam – Year 10 – Level 6: Maths B & C
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 11 A Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 11
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2MoneyProblems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
3PercentagesIntroduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
4PercentagesChanging fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
5PercentagesChanging percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
6PercentagesOne quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
7PercentagesCalculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
8Trigonometry-ratiosTrigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
9Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
10Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
11Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
12Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
13Trigonometry-ratiosUnknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
14Trigonometry-compassBearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
15Trigonometry-elevationAngles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
16Trigonometry-practicalTrigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
17Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
18Trigonometry- ratiosUsing the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
19PythagorasFind the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
20PythagorasPythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
21PythagorasFind the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
22PythagorasCalculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
23AreaArea of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
24AreaArea of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
25AreaArea of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
26AreaArea of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
27VolumeVolume of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume.
28VolumeVolume of pyramids and cones.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of right pyramids and cones, and calculate the volume of a variety of pyramids and cones.
29VolumeComposite solids.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: dissect composite solids into simpler shapes so that the volume can be calculated, calculate the volume of a variety of composite solids, and use formulae appropriately.
30MassProblems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
31AreaProblems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
32Volume/capacityProblems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
33Surface areaSurface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
34Surface areaSurface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
35Surface areaSurface area of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
36Surface areaSurface area of pyramids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of pyramids.
37Surface areaSurface area of cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of cones by finding the area or the base ‘p r . ‘and the area of the curved surface ‘ p r l’. The student will also be able to find the slant height ‘l’ given the perpendicul
38Surface areaSurface area of composite solids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of Composite solids.
39Algebraic expressionsAlgebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
40Algebraic expressionsSubstitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
41Algebraic expressionsDirected numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
42Algebraic expressionsDirected numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
43Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
44Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
45Algebraic expressionsSimplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
46Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
47Algebraic expressionsSimplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
48Algebraic expressionsExpanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
49Algebraic expressionsExpanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
50Algebraic expressionsExpanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
51Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
52Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
53Algebraic equationsSolving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
54Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
55Algebraic equationsEquations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
56Algebraic equationsEquations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
57Algebra- formulaeEquations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
58Algebra- formulaeChanging the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
59Algebra-inequalitiesSolving Inequalities.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities.
60Algebra-factorisingSimplifying easy algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to simplify algebraic fractions by factorising.
61Absolute value or modulusSolving and graphing inequalities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve inequalities involving one absolute value.
62Geometric transformationsGeometry transformations without matrices: reflection (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use and understand the language used in geometric transformations and perform reflections in a number plane.
63Geometric transformationsGeometry transformations without matrices: translation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform translations in a number plane.
64Geometric transformationsGeometry transformations without matrices: rotation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform and construct rotations.
65Geometric transformationsGeometry transformations without matrices: dilation or enlargement (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform the non-congruent transformation of dilation or emlargement and calculate scale factor.
66Geometric transformationsThe definition and concept of combined transformations resulting in an equivalent single transformation.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will combine reflections and glide transformations to produce single isometric transformations.
67StatisticsFrequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
68StatisticsFrequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
69StatisticsRelative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
70StatisticsThe range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
71Statistic-probabilityThe mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
72Statistic-probabilityThe mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
73Statistic-probabilityThe median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
74Statistic-probabilityCumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
75Statistic-probabilityCalculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
76Statistics – grouped dataCalculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
77Statistics using a calculatorStatistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
78Statistics – Range and dispersionRange as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
79Statistics – SpreadMeasures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
80Statistics – Standard deviationStandard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
81Statistics – Standard deviationNormal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
82Statistics – Interquartile rangeMeasures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
83StatisticsStem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
84StatisticsScatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
85Sequences and Series-Compound interestCompound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
86LogicInductive and deductive reasoning
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand and use the terms hypothesis, conclusion, inductive and deductive.
87LogicDefinition and use of counter examples
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to create counter examples to statements.
88LogicIndirect proofs
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use indirect proofs by assuming the opposite of the statement being proved.
89Statistic-probabilityProbability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
90Statistic-probabilityRolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
91Statistic-probabilityExperimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
92Statistic-probabilityTree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
93Statistic-probabilityTree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
94Coordinate Geometry-the planeDistance formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the distance between any two points on the number plane and interpret the results.
95Coordinate Geometry-midpoint, slopeMid-point formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the mid point formula and use it practically.
96Coordinate Geometry-gradientGradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
97Coordinate Geometry-gradientGradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
98Coordinate Geometry-straight lineThe straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
99Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc.Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
100Coordinate Geometry-equation of lineGeneral form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
101ExamExam – Year 11 – Maths A
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 11 B Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 11
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2Graphing binomialsBinomial products.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the term binomial product and be capable of expanding and simplifying an expression.
3Graphing binomialsBinomial products with negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand specific terms and be prepared to expand and simplify different monic binomial products.
4Graphing binomialsBinomial products [non-monic].
Objective: On completion of the lesson, the student will have examined more complex examples with binomial products.
5Squaring binomialSquaring a binomial. [monic]
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should understand the simple one-step process of squaring a monic binomial.
6Algebra – Products and factorsSquaring a Binomial (nonmonic)
Objective: To expand the square of a nonmonic binomial by inspection
7FactorisingExpansions leading to the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand expansions leading to differences of 2 squares.
8Algebraic expressions-productsProducts in simplification of algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simplification of algebraic expressions in step-by-step processing.
9Algebraic expressions-larger expansionsAlgebraic Expressions – Larger expansions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of expanding larger algebraic expressions.
10Algebra-highest common factorHighest common factor.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of turning a simple algebraic expression into the product of a factor in parentheses and identifying the highest common factors of the whole expression.
11Geometry-circlesThe equation of a circle: to find radii of circles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe a circle mathematically given its equation or its graph. Additionally, the student will be able to work out the equation of a circle given its centre and radius.
12Geometry-circlesThe semicircle: to select the equation given the semi circle and vice versa
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to sketch a semicircle given its equation and derive the equation of a given semicircle.
13Geometry-parabolaThe parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
14Functions and graphsQuadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
15Functions and graphsGraphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
16Graphing rootsGraphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
17Coordinate geometrySolve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
18Factors by groupingFactors by grouping.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression.
19Difference of 2 squaresDifference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors.
20Common fact and diffCommon factor and the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares.
21Quadratic trinomialsQuadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive.
22Factorising quadsFactorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will accurately identify the process if the middle term of a quadratic trinomial is negative.
23Factorising quadsFactorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 3.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an increased knowledge on factorising quadratic trinomials and will understand where the 2nd term is positive and the 3rd term is negative.
24Factorising quadsFactorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to factorise all of the possible types of monic quadratic trinomials and specifcally where the 2nd term and 3rd terms are negative.
25Factorising quadsFactorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of factorising any quadratic trinomial.
26Factorising quadsFactorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials – moon method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student know two methods for factorisation of quadratic trinomials including the cross method.
27Sum/diff 2 cubesSum and difference of two cubes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be cognisant of the sum and difference of 2 cubes and be capable of factorising them.
28Algebraic fractionsSimplifying algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be familiar with all of the factorisation methods presented to this point.
29Graphing-polynomialsGraphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
30Graphing-polynomialsGeneral equation of a circle: determine and graph the equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve these types of problems. Working with circles will also help the student in the topic of circle geometry, which tests the student’s skills in logic and reasoning.
31Graphing-cubic curvesGraphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
32Uniform motionAverage speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units for speed, distance and time.
33Uniform motionUsing subscripted variables
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, distance and time.
34Uniform motionUniform motion with equal distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, equal distances and time.
35Uniform motionUniform motion adding the distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, adding distances for total distance and time.
36Uniform motionUniform Motion With Unequal Distances or Time
Objective: To solve motion problems where either distance or time are different
37Uniform motionUniform motion of all types
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use all types of subscripted variables for calculations to determine speed, distance and time.
38Motion under accelerationMotion under gravity – objects in vertical motion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will convert rates and use equations of motion that include uniform acceleration.
39Motion under accelerationIntroducing initial velocity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use equations of motion that include uniform acceleration and an initial velocity.
40Absolute value equationsAbsolute value equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to relate to graphs involving the absolute value function. The student will be capable of graphing the function given its equation and be able to solve for the intersection of an absolute value functio
41Rect.hyperbolaThe rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
42Exponential functionThe exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
43Log functionsLogarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
44FunctionsDefinition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
45FunctionsNotation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
46FunctionsMore on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
47FunctionsDomain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
48FunctionsEvaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
49FunctionsFunctions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
50FunctionsComposition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
51FunctionsInverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
52FunctionsRational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
53FunctionsRational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
54FunctionsParametric equations (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to eliminate the parameter from a set of equations and identify appropriate restrictions on the domain and range.
55FunctionsPolynomial addition etc in combining and simplifying functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have multiple techniques to understand and construct graphs using algebra.
56FunctionsParametric functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some standard parametric forms using trigonometric identities, appreciate the beauty of the the graphs that can be generated and an application to projectile motion.
57Algebra-polynomialsIntroduction to polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand all the terminology associated with polynomials and be able to judge if any algebraic expression is a polynomial or not.
58Algebra-polynomialsThe sum, difference and product of two polynomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add subtract and multiply polynomials and find the degrees of the answers.
59Algebra-polynomialsPolynomials and long division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the long division process with polynomials.
60Remainder theoremThe remainder theorem.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how the remainder theorem works and how it can be applied.
61Remainder theoremMore on remainder theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the remainder theorem and how it can be applied to solve some interesting questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
62Factor theoremThe factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the factor theorem and determine if a term in the form of x minus a is a factor of a given polynomial.
63Factor theoremMore on the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will fully understand the factor theorem and how it can be applied to solve some questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
64Factor theoremComplete factorisations using the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to factorise polynomials of a higher degree than 2 and to find their zeros.
65Polynomial equationsPolynomial equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of solving polynomial equations given in different forms.
66Graphs, polynomialsGraphs of polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to graph polynomials using the zeros of polynomials, the y intercepts and the direction of the curves.
67CalculusLimits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems using limiting sum rule.
68Calculus=1st prinDifferentiation from first principles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able apply the first principles (calculus) formula to find the gradient of a tangent at any point on a continuous curve.
69Calculus=1st prinDifferentiation of y = x to the power of n.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to differentiate a number of expressions involving x raised to the power of n.
70Calculus-differential, integMeaning of dy over dx – equations of tangents and normals.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to apply differentiation and algebra skills to find the equation of the tangent and the normal to a point on a curve.
71Calculus-differential, integFunction of a function rule, product rule, quotient rule.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will understand how to use the chain rule, the product rule and the quotient rule.
72Calculus-differential, integIncreasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the first derivative of various functions, and use it in various situations to identify increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
73CalculusFirst Derivative – turning points and curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first derivative to find and identify the nature of stationary points on a curve.
74Calculus-2nd derivativeThe second derivative – concavity.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to find a second derivative, and use it to find the domain over which a curve is concave up or concave down, as well as any points of inflexion.
75Calculus – Curve sketchingCurve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first and second derivatives to find turning points of a curve, identify maxima and minima, and concavity, then use this information to sketch a curve.
76Calculus – Maxima minimaPractical applications of maxima and minima
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply calculus to a suite of simple maxima or minima problems.
77Trigonometry-elevationAngles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
78Trigonometry-practicalTrigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
79Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
80Trigonometry- ratiosUsing the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
81Trigonometry-exact ratiosTrigonometric ratios of 30., 45. and 60. – exact ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the exact sine, cosine and tangent ratios for the angles 30., 45.and 60.
82Trigonometry-cosine ruleThe cosine rule to find an unknown side. [Case 1 SAS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine rule to find the length of an unknown side of a triangle knowing 2 sides and the included angle.
83Trigonometry-cosine ruleThe cosine rule to find an unknown angle. [Case 2 SSS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the size of an unknown angle of a triangle using the cosine rule given the lengths of the 3 sides.
84Trigonometry-sine ruleThe sine rule to find an unknown side. Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the Sine rule to find the length of a particular side when the student is given the sizes of 2 of the angles and one of the sides.
85Trigonometry-sine ruleThe sine rule to find an unknown angle. Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine rule to find an unknown angle when given 2 sides and a non-included angle.
86Trigonometry-areasThe area formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine formula for finding the area of a triangle given 2 sides and the included angle.
87Trig-reciprocal ratiosReciprocal ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the reciprocal trigonometric ratios of sine, cosine and tan, that is, the cosecant, secant and cotangent ratios.
88Trig complementary anglesComplementary angle results.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to establish the complementary angle results for the sine and cosine ratios and then how to use these results to solve trig equations.
89Trig identitiesTrigonometric identities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify trigonometrical expressions and solve trigonometry equations using the knowledge of trig identities.
90Trig larger anglesAngles of any magnitude
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the trigonometric values of angles of any magnitude by assigning angles to the four quadrants of the circle.
91Trig larger anglesTrigonometric ratios of 0°, 90°, 180°, 270° and 360°
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to find the Trigonometric Ratios of 0, 90, 180, 270 and 360 degrees.
92Graph sineGraphing the trigonometric ratios – I Sine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and draw the sine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
93Graph cosineGraphing the trigonometric ratios – II Cosine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the cosine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
94Graphs tan curveGraphing the trigonometric ratios – III Tangent curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the tan curve.
95Graph reciprocalsGraphing the trigonometric ratios – IV Reciprocal ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the curves of the reciprocal ratios: cosec, sec and cot.
96Trig larger anglesUsing one ratio to find another.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will find other trig ratios given one trig ratio and to work with angles of any magnitude.
97Trig equationsSolving trigonometric equations – Type I.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve simple trig equations with restricted domains.
98Trig equationsSolving trigonometric equations – Type II.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with multiples of theta and restricted domains.
99Trig equationsSolving trigonometric equations – Type III.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with two trig ratios and restricted domains.
100Rules for indices/exponentsAdding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
101Indices/ExponentsSubtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: To subtract indices when dividing powers of the same base
102Rules for indices/exponentsMultiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
103Rules for indices/exponentsMultiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
104Rules for indices/exponentsTerms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
105Rules for indices/exponentsNegative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
106Indices/ExponentsFractional Indices
Objective: To evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices
107Fractional indices/exponentsComplex fractions as indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing complex fractional indices.
108Scientific notationScientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
109Scientific notationScientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
110Scientific notationChanging scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
111Significant figuresSignificant figures
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures.
112Algebraic fractionsSimplifying algebraic fractions using the index laws.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify most algebraic fractions using different methodologies.
113Algebra-negative indicesAlgebraic fractions resulting in negative indices.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand how to simplify an algebraic fractional expression with a negative index, and also how to write such an expression without a negative index.
114Logarithms-Power of 2Powers of 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to convert between logarithmic statements and index statements to the power of 2.
115Logarithms-Equations and logsEquations of type log x to the base 3 = 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the number from which the logarithm evolves.
116Logarithms-Equations and logsEquations of type log 32 to the base x = 5.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the base from which the number came.
117Logarithms-Log lawsLaws of logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with 5 logarithm laws.
118Logarithms-Log laws expansionUsing the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
119Sequences and SeriesGeneral sequences.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work out a formula from a given number pattern and then be able to find particular terms of that sequence using the formula.
120Sequences and SeriesFinding Tn given Sn.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concept that the sum of n terms of a series minus the sum of n minus one terms will yield the nth term.
121Geometric ProgressionThe geometric progression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is a Geometric Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the G.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
122Geometric ProgressionFinding the position of a term in a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find terms in a geometric progression and how to apply it different types of problems.
123Geometric ProgressionGiven two terms of G.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to solve all problems involving finding the common ratio of a Geometric Progression.
124Sequences and Series-Geometric meansGeometric means.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make a geometric progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of geometric means.
125Sequences and Series-Sum of gpThe sum to n terms of a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas and how to use them to solve problems in summing terms of a Geometric Progression (G.P).
126Sequences and Series-Sigma notationSigma notation
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will be familiar with the sigma notation and how it operates.
127Sequences and Series-Sum-infinityLimiting sum or sum to infinity.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have learnt the formula for the limiting sum of a G.P., the conditions for it to exist and how to apply it to particular problems.
128Sequences and Series-Recurring decimal infinityRecurring decimals and the infinite G.P.
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will have understood how to convert any recurring decimal to a rational number.
129Sequences and Series-Compound interestCompound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
130Sequences and Series-SuperannuationSuperannuation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the method of finding the accumulated amount of a superannuation investment using the sum formula for a G.P.
131Sequences and Series-Time paymentsTime payments.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have examined examples carefully and be capable of setting out the long method of calculating a regular payment for a reducible interest loan.
132StatisticsFrequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
133StatisticsFrequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
134StatisticsRelative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
135StatisticsThe range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
136Statistic-probabilityThe mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
137Statistic-probabilityThe mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
138Statistic-probabilityThe median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
139Statistic-probabilityCumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
140Statistic-probabilityCalculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
141Statistics – grouped dataCalculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
142Statistics using a calculatorStatistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
143Statistics – Range and dispersionRange as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
144Statistics – SpreadMeasures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
145Statistics – Standard deviationStandard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
146Statistics – Standard deviationNormal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
147Statistics – Interquartile rangeMeasures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
148StatisticsStem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
149StatisticsScatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
150Statistic-probabilityBinomial Theorem – Pascal’s Triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use Pascal’s triangle and the binomial theorem to write the expansion of binomial expressions raised to integer powers.
151Statistic-probabilityBinomial probabilities using the Binomial Theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve certain types of probability questions using the binomial theorem
152Statistic-probabilityCounting techniques and ordered selections – permutations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be competent in using some new counting techniques used for solving probability.
153ProbabilityUnordered selections – combinations
Objective: To use the nCr formula to solve problems where unordered selections occur
154ExamExam – Year 11 – Maths B
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 11 B and C Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 11
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2Graphing binomialsBinomial products.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the term binomial product and be capable of expanding and simplifying an expression.
3Graphing binomialsBinomial products with negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand specific terms and be prepared to expand and simplify different monic binomial products.
4Graphing binomialsBinomial products [non-monic].
Objective: On completion of the lesson, the student will have examined more complex examples with binomial products.
5Squaring binomialSquaring a binomial. [monic]
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should understand the simple one-step process of squaring a monic binomial.
6Algebra – Products and factorsSquaring a Binomial (nonmonic)
Objective: To expand the square of a nonmonic binomial by inspection
7FactorisingExpansions leading to the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand expansions leading to differences of 2 squares.
8Algebraic expressions-productsProducts in simplification of algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simplification of algebraic expressions in step-by-step processing.
9Algebraic expressions-larger expansionsAlgebraic Expressions – Larger expansions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of expanding larger algebraic expressions.
10Algebra-highest common factorHighest common factor.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of turning a simple algebraic expression into the product of a factor in parentheses and identifying the highest common factors of the whole expression.
11Geometry-circlesThe equation of a circle: to find radii of circles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe a circle mathematically given its equation or its graph. Additionally, the student will be able to work out the equation of a circle given its centre and radius.
12Geometry-circlesThe semicircle: to select the equation given the semi circle and vice versa
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to sketch a semicircle given its equation and derive the equation of a given semicircle.
13Geometry-parabolaThe parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
14Functions and graphsQuadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
15Functions and graphsGraphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
16Graphing rootsGraphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
17Coordinate geometrySolve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
18Factors by groupingFactors by grouping.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression.
19Difference of 2 squaresDifference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors.
20Common fact and diffCommon factor and the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares.
21Quadratic trinomialsQuadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive.
22Factorising quadsFactorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will accurately identify the process if the middle term of a quadratic trinomial is negative.
23Factorising quadsFactorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 3.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an increased knowledge on factorising quadratic trinomials and will understand where the 2nd term is positive and the 3rd term is negative.
24Factorising quadsFactorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to factorise all of the possible types of monic quadratic trinomials and specifcally where the 2nd term and 3rd terms are negative.
25Factorising quadsFactorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of factorising any quadratic trinomial.
26Factorising quadsFactorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials – moon method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student know two methods for factorisation of quadratic trinomials including the cross method.
27Sum/diff 2 cubesSum and difference of two cubes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be cognisant of the sum and difference of 2 cubes and be capable of factorising them.
28Algebraic fractionsSimplifying algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be familiar with all of the factorisation methods presented to this point.
29Graphing-polynomialsGraphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
30Graphing-polynomialsGeneral equation of a circle: determine and graph the equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve these types of problems. Working with circles will also help the student in the topic of circle geometry, which tests the student’s skills in logic and reasoning.
31Graphing-cubic curvesGraphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
32Absolute value equationsAbsolute value equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to relate to graphs involving the absolute value function. The student will be capable of graphing the function given its equation and be able to solve for the intersection of an absolute value functio
33Rect.hyperbolaThe rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
34Exponential functionThe exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
35Uniform motionAverage speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units for speed, distance and time.
36Uniform motionUsing subscripted variables
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, distance and time.
37Uniform motionUniform motion with equal distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, equal distances and time.
38Uniform motionUniform motion adding the distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, adding distances for total distance and time.
39Uniform motionUniform Motion With Unequal Distances or Time
Objective: To solve motion problems where either distance or time are different
40Uniform motionUniform motion of all types
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use all types of subscripted variables for calculations to determine speed, distance and time.
41Motion under accelerationMotion under gravity – objects in vertical motion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will convert rates and use equations of motion that include uniform acceleration.
42Motion under accelerationIntroducing initial velocity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use equations of motion that include uniform acceleration and an initial velocity.
43Log functionsLogarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
44FunctionsDefinition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
45FunctionsNotation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
46FunctionsMore on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
47FunctionsDomain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
48FunctionsEvaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
49FunctionsFunctions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
50FunctionsComposition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
51FunctionsInverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
52Algebra-polynomialsIntroduction to polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand all the terminology associated with polynomials and be able to judge if any algebraic expression is a polynomial or not.
53Algebra-polynomialsThe sum, difference and product of two polynomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add subtract and multiply polynomials and find the degrees of the answers.
54Algebra-polynomialsPolynomials and long division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the long division process with polynomials.
55Remainder theoremThe remainder theorem.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how the remainder theorem works and how it can be applied.
56Remainder theoremMore on remainder theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the remainder theorem and how it can be applied to solve some interesting questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
57Factor theoremThe factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the factor theorem and determine if a term in the form of x minus a is a factor of a given polynomial.
58Factor theoremMore on the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will fully understand the factor theorem and how it can be applied to solve some questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
59Factor theoremComplete factorisations using the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to factorise polynomials of a higher degree than 2 and to find their zeros.
60Polynomial equationsPolynomial equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of solving polynomial equations given in different forms.
61Graphs, polynomialsGraphs of polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to graph polynomials using the zeros of polynomials, the y intercepts and the direction of the curves.
62CalculusLimits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems using limiting sum rule.
63Calculus=1st prinDifferentiation from first principles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able apply the first principles (calculus) formula to find the gradient of a tangent at any point on a continuous curve.
64Calculus=1st prinDifferentiation of y = x to the power of n.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to differentiate a number of expressions involving x raised to the power of n.
65Calculus-differential, integMeaning of dy over dx – equations of tangents and normals.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to apply differentiation and algebra skills to find the equation of the tangent and the normal to a point on a curve.
66Calculus-differential, integFunction of a function rule, product rule, quotient rule.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will understand how to use the chain rule, the product rule and the quotient rule.
67Calculus-differential, integIncreasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the first derivative of various functions, and use it in various situations to identify increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
68CalculusFirst Derivative – turning points and curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first derivative to find and identify the nature of stationary points on a curve.
69Calculus-2nd derivativeThe second derivative – concavity.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to find a second derivative, and use it to find the domain over which a curve is concave up or concave down, as well as any points of inflexion.
70Calculus – Curve sketchingCurve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first and second derivatives to find turning points of a curve, identify maxima and minima, and concavity, then use this information to sketch a curve.
71Calculus – Maxima minimaPractical applications of maxima and minima
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply calculus to a suite of simple maxima or minima problems.
72Trigonometry-elevationAngles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
73Trigonometry-practicalTrigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
74Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
75Trigonometry- ratiosUsing the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
76Trigonometry-exact ratiosTrigonometric ratios of 30., 45. and 60. – exact ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the exact sine, cosine and tangent ratios for the angles 30., 45.and 60.
77Trigonometry-cosine ruleThe cosine rule to find an unknown side. [Case 1 SAS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine rule to find the length of an unknown side of a triangle knowing 2 sides and the included angle.
78Trigonometry-cosine ruleThe cosine rule to find an unknown angle. [Case 2 SSS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the size of an unknown angle of a triangle using the cosine rule given the lengths of the 3 sides.
79Trigonometry-sine ruleThe sine rule to find an unknown side. Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the Sine rule to find the length of a particular side when the student is given the sizes of 2 of the angles and one of the sides.
80Trigonometry-sine ruleThe sine rule to find an unknown angle. Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine rule to find an unknown angle when given 2 sides and a non-included angle.
81Trigonometry-areasThe area formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine formula for finding the area of a triangle given 2 sides and the included angle.
82Trig-reciprocal ratiosReciprocal ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the reciprocal trigonometric ratios of sine, cosine and tan, that is, the cosecant, secant and cotangent ratios.
83Trig complementary anglesComplementary angle results.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to establish the complementary angle results for the sine and cosine ratios and then how to use these results to solve trig equations.
84Trig identitiesTrigonometric identities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify trigonometrical expressions and solve trigonometry equations using the knowledge of trig identities.
85Trig larger anglesAngles of any magnitude
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the trigonometric values of angles of any magnitude by assigning angles to the four quadrants of the circle.
86Trig larger anglesTrigonometric ratios of 0°, 90°, 180°, 270° and 360°
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to find the Trigonometric Ratios of 0, 90, 180, 270 and 360 degrees.
87Graph sineGraphing the trigonometric ratios – I Sine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and draw the sine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
88Graph cosineGraphing the trigonometric ratios – II Cosine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the cosine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
89Graphs tan curveGraphing the trigonometric ratios – III Tangent curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the tan curve.
90Graph reciprocalsGraphing the trigonometric ratios – IV Reciprocal ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the curves of the reciprocal ratios: cosec, sec and cot.
91Trig larger anglesUsing one ratio to find another.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will find other trig ratios given one trig ratio and to work with angles of any magnitude.
92Trig equationsSolving trigonometric equations – Type I.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve simple trig equations with restricted domains.
93Trig equationsSolving trigonometric equations – Type II.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with multiples of theta and restricted domains.
94Trig equationsSolving trigonometric equations – Type III.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with two trig ratios and restricted domains.
95Rules for indices/exponentsTerms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
96Rules for indices/exponentsNegative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
97Fractional indices/exponentsFractional indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices.
98Fractional indices/exponentsComplex fractions as indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing complex fractional indices.
99Scientific notationScientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
100Scientific notationScientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
101Standard/Scientific notationChanging scientific notation to numerals
Objective: To interpret scientific notation by writing in base 10 numerals
102Significant figuresSignificant figures
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures.
103Algebraic fractionsSimplifying algebraic fractions using the index laws.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify most algebraic fractions using different methodologies.
104Algebra-negative indicesAlgebraic fractions resulting in negative indices.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand how to simplify an algebraic fractional expression with a negative index, and also how to write such an expression without a negative index.
105Logarithms-Power of 2Powers of 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to convert between logarithmic statements and index statements to the power of 2.
106Logarithms-Equations and logsEquations of type log x to the base 3 = 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the number from which the logarithm evolves.
107Logarithms-Equations and logsEquations of type log 32 to the base x = 5.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the base from which the number came.
108Logarithms-Log lawsLaws of logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with 5 logarithm laws.
109Logarithms-Log laws expansionUsing the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
110Logarithms-Log laws simplifyingUsing the log laws to simplify expressions involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify logarithmic expressions using the log laws.
111Logarithms-Log laws numbersUsing the log laws to find the logarithms of numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the use of the log laws and be able to do more applications with numerical examples.
112Logarithms-Equations and logsEquations involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations with log terms.
113Logarithms-Logs to solve equationsUsing logarithms to solve equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use logarithms to solve index equations with the assistance of a calculator.
114Logarithms-Change base formulaChange of base formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have seen the change of base formula for logarithms and be capable of using it to change the logarithm of one base to another base.
115Logarithms-Graph-log curveThe graph of the logarithmic curve
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a logarithmic curve to a given base and know the general properties of log curves.
116Logarithms-Log curvesWorking with log curves.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with log curves
117Sequences and SeriesGeneral sequences.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work out a formula from a given number pattern and then be able to find particular terms of that sequence using the formula.
118Sequences and SeriesFinding Tn given Sn.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concept that the sum of n terms of a series minus the sum of n minus one terms will yield the nth term.
119Arithmetic ProgressionThe arithmetic progression
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is an Arithmetic Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the A.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
120Arithmetic ProgressionFinding the position of a term in an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve many problems involving finding terms of an Arithmetic Progression.
121Arithmetic ProgressionGiven two terms of A.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find any term of an Arithmetic Progression when given two terms
122Arithmetic ProgressionArithmetic means
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make an arithmetic progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of arithmetic means.
123Arithmetic ProgressionThe sum to n terms of an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas for the sum of an Arithmetic Progression and how to use them in solving problems.
124Geometric ProgressionThe geometric progression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is a Geometric Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the G.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
125Geometric ProgressionFinding the position of a term in a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find terms in a geometric progression and how to apply it different types of problems.
126Geometric ProgressionGiven two terms of G.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to solve all problems involving finding the common ratio of a Geometric Progression.
127Sequences and Series-Geometric meansGeometric means.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make a geometric progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of geometric means.
128Sequences and Series-Sum of gpThe sum to n terms of a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas and how to use them to solve problems in summing terms of a Geometric Progression (G.P).
129Sequences and Series-Sigma notationSigma notation
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will be familiar with the sigma notation and how it operates.
130Sequences and Series-Sum-infinityLimiting sum or sum to infinity.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have learnt the formula for the limiting sum of a G.P., the conditions for it to exist and how to apply it to particular problems.
131Sequences and Series-Recurring decimal infinityRecurring decimals and the infinite G.P.
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will have understood how to convert any recurring decimal to a rational number.
132Sequences and Series-Compound interestCompound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
133Sequences and Series-SuperannuationSuperannuation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the method of finding the accumulated amount of a superannuation investment using the sum formula for a G.P.
134Sequences and Series-Time paymentsTime payments.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have examined examples carefully and be capable of setting out the long method of calculating a regular payment for a reducible interest loan.
135Sequences and SeriesApplications of arithmetic sequences
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of problems involving practical situations with arithmetic series.
136Calculus – IntegrationIntegration – anti-differentiation, primitive function
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use rules of integration to find primitives of some simple functions.
137Calculus – Computation areaComputation of an area
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to select an appropriate formula to calculate an area, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and use correct limits in the formula to evaluate an area.
138Calculus – Computation volumesComputation of volumes of revolution
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to choose an appropriate volume formula, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and then calculate a result to a prescribed accuracy.
139Calculus – Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rulesThe Trapezium rule and Simpson’s rule
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to calculate sub-intervals, set up a table of values, then apply the Trapezoidal Rule, or Simpson’s Rule to approximate an area beneath a curve.
140Statistics – SpreadMeasures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
141Statistics – Standard deviationStandard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
142Statistics – Standard deviationNormal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
143Statistics – Interquartile rangeMeasures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
144StatisticsStem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
145StatisticsScatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
146Statistic-probabilityBinomial Theorem – Pascal’s Triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use Pascal’s triangle and the binomial theorem to write the expansion of binomial expressions raised to integer powers.
147Statistic-probabilityBinomial probabilities using the Binomial Theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve certain types of probability questions using the binomial theorem
148Statistic-probabilityCounting techniques and ordered selections – permutations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be competent in using some new counting techniques used for solving probability.
149ProbabilityUnordered selections – combinations
Objective: To use the nCr formula to solve problems where unordered selections occur
150Number theory – setsNumber sets and their members
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the notation used with sets and the subsets of the real number system.
151Number theory – operationsProperties of real numbers using addition and multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know and use the closure, identity, commutative, associative, identity and distributive properties for addition and multiplication.
152Number theory – equationsTransformations that produce equivalent equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know and use the correct terms to describe the processes in solving equations.
153LogicInductive and deductive reasoning
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand and use the terms hypothesis, conclusion, inductive and deductive.
154LogicDefinition and use of counter examples
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to create counter examples to statements.
155LogicIndirect proofs
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use indirect proofs by assuming the opposite of the statement being proved.
156LogicMathematical induction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform the process of mathematical induction for simple series.
157LogicConditional statements (converse, inverse and contrapositive) (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to form related conditional statements.
158TranslationsTransformations – reflections
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to take a pre-image and using the appropriate techniques, accurately show its image after reflection.
159Geometric transformationsGeometry transformations without matrices: reflection (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use and understand the language used in geometric transformations and perform reflections in a number plane.
160Geometric transformationsGeometry transformations without matrices: translation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform translations in a number plane.
161Geometric transformationsGeometry transformations without matrices: rotation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform and construct rotations.
162Geometric transformationsGeometry transformations without matrices: dilation or enlargement (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform the non-congruent transformation of dilation or emlargement and calculate scale factor.
163Geometric transformationsThe definition and concept of combined transformations resulting in an equivalent single transformation.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will combine reflections and glide transformations to produce single isometric transformations.
164Logarithms-Complex numbersImaginary numbers and standard form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for addition and subtraction.
165Logarithms-Complex numbersComplex numbers – multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
166Logarithms-Complex numbersPlotting complex number and graphical representation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the argand diagram to assist in the addition and subtraction of complex numbers.
167Logarithms-Complex numbersAbsolute value
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the absolute value or modulus of complex numbers
168Logarithms-Complex numbersTrigonometric form of a complex number
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will write complex numbers in trigonometric or polar form. This may also be known as mod-ard form.
169Logarithms-Complex numbersMultiplication and division of complex numbers in trig form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the trig form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
170Logarithms-Complex numbersDeMoivre’s theorem (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use DeMoivre’s theorem to find powers of complex numbers in trig form.
171Logarithms-Complex numbersThe nth root of real and complex numbers (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use DeMoivre’s theorem to find roots of complex numbers in trig form.
172Logarithms-Complex numbersFundamental theorem of algebra (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and use the fundamental theorem of algebra to find factors for polynomials with real coefficients over the complex number field.
173MatricesBasic concepts – Matrices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have had an introduction to matrices
174MatricesAddition and subtraction of matrices
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to recognise when addition and subtraction of matrices is possible, and perform these operations.
175MatricesScalar matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to perform scalar multiplication of a matrix.
176MatricesMultiplication of one matrix by another matrix
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to state whether matrix by matrix multiplication is possible, predict the order of the answer matrix, and then perform matrix by matrix multiplication.
177MatricesTranslation in the number plane
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to place ordered pairs into a matrix, then perform translation by addition using a transformation matrix, then extract ordered pairs from an answer matrix.
178MatricesTranslation by matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert ordered pairs to elements of a matrix, multiply matrices together, where possible, and interpret the answer matrix on a number plane.
179TransformationsSpecial transformations – reflections, rotations and enlargements.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform transformations: to rotate, reflect and change the size of various shapes and or points where applicable.
180VectorsVectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent a vector in matrix and diagrammatic form, as well as add two vectors using matrices and/or a diagram.
181Simultaneous equationsNumber of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
182Vectors2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
183Linear systemsOptimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
184Linear systemsLinear systems with matrices (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations.
185Linear systemsRow-echelon form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the row-echelon form.
186Linear systemsGauss Jordan elimination method (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the Gauss Jordan elimination method.
187Conic sectionsIntroduction to conic sections and their general equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the conic section from the coefficients of the equation.
188Conic sectionsThe parabola x. = 4ay
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the focus and directrix for a parabola given in standard form.
189Conic sectionsCircles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the radius of a circle given in standard form.
190Conic sectionsEllipses
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices and axes of an ellipse.
191Conic sectionsHyperbola
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices, axes and asymptotes of a hyperbola.
192TrigonometrySin(A+B) etc sum and difference identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using the reference triangles for 30, 45 and 60 degrees with the sum and difference of angles to find additional exact values of trigonometric ratios.
193TrigonometryDouble angle formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the double angle trig identities.
194TrigonometryHalf angle identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the power reducing formulas and the half angle trig identities.
195Trigonometryt Formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations using the t substitution.
196ExamExam – Year 11 – Maths B & C
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 11 Prevocational Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Self AssessmentSelf Assessment – Year 11 Prevocational
Objective: Assessment
2CalculationsSubtraction by Comparison
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods.
3CalculationsSubtraction up to the number 20 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences.
4AdditionAddition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
5SubtractionSubtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
6SubtractionSubtraction with borrowing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method
7SubtractionSubtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct.
8Place valueThe numbers 1000 to 9999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
9AdditionAddition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
10SubtractionSubtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
11MultiplicationMultiplication using extended algorithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms.
12DivisionDivision with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
13DivisionDividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
14Counting and numerationThe numbers 10 000 to 99 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers.
15Counting and numerationAddition to 9999 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems.
16Basic mathematics part 2Subtraction involving four-digit numbers and beyond
Objective: To subtract 4 or 5-digit numbers from 5-digit numbers using the Renaming Method
17Counting and numerationSeven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
18MultiplicationMultiplication by 2 and 3 digits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form.
19DivisionDivide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction.
20Measurement – LengthRead and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: To read distances (km) from a map and calculate total distances between locations
21LengthCompare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
22AreaIntroduction to the square centimetre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly.
23AreaIntroducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
24AreaFinding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
25AreaLarger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
26VolumeIntroduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo
273-D shapesConstructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
28Measurement – VolumeUsing the Cubic Metre to Measure Volume
Objective: To calculate the volume of rectangular prisms in cubic metres
29DecimalsIntroduction to decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places.
30DecimalsComparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places.
31DecimalsDecimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals.
32DecimalsAdding decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
33DecimalsSubtracting decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
34DecimalsUsing decimals – shopping problems
Objective: To read and interpret problems involving money
35DecimalsUsing decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
36DecimalsRounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
37DecimalsDecimals to three decimal places
Objective: To express a number on a thousand as a decimal in thousandths
38DecimalsAdding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
39DecimalsSubtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: To subtract decimals with a different number of decimal places
40DecimalsMultiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
41DecimalsMultiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
42DecimalsMultiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
43DecimalsDividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
44DecimalsDividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
45DecimalsDividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
46VolumeSolving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
47VolumeSolving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
48CapacityUsing the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
49CapacityUsing the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
50CapacityThe relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
51CapacityConverting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
52CapacityEstimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
53CapacityConverting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
54Weight/massIntroducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
55Weight/massThe kilogram
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales.
56Weight/massThe gram and net mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams.
57Weight/massThe tonne – converting units and problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to: choose the correct unit to measure the mass of small, medium or large objects, and convert measurements from one unit to another.
58VolumeFinding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
59FractionsUsing fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
60FractionsUsing fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
61FractionsComparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
62FractionsMixed numerals
Objective: To name and recognise mixed numerals
63FractionsImproper fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally.
64FractionsFractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100.
65FractionsFinding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
66FractionsMultiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form.
67FractionsReducing fractions to lowest equivalent form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor.
68FractionsComparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one.
69FractionsSubtracting fractions from whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from
70FractionsAdding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: To add and subtract fractions with the same denominator
71FractionsAdding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
72FractionsMultiplying fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers.
73FractionsFractions of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection.
74FractionsMultiplying fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
75FractionsMultiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
76FractionsFinding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
77FractionsDividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
78FractionsDividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
79PercentagesCalculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
80PercentagesIntroduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
81PercentagesChanging fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
82PercentagesChanging percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
83PercentagesOne quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
84Time, minutesAnalogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock.
85Time, unitsUnits of time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units of time and read and interpret simple timetables, timelines and calendars.
86TimeTelling the time – minutes past the hour
Objective: To read analogue time to the minute past the hour
87Time, minutes to the hourMinutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
88Time, 24-hour24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
89Time zonesTime zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
90Time, distance, speedAverage speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
91AnglesMeasure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
922-D shapesRecognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
93Tessellating 2-D shapesUse grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
94SpaceRecognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: To name prisms according to the shape of the base
953-D shapesRecognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
963-D shapesRecognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
973-D shapesViewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
98Lines and anglesMapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
99Lines and anglesMain and intermediate compass points
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use main and intermediate compass points to specify location.
100DataPictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
101Graphs – BasicColumn Graphs
Objective: To read and interpret column graphs
102DataLine graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
103DataPie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
104Sign word problemsSolving Word Problems by recognising Sign Words
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems by recognising Sign Words that identify which operation to use: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division.
105EquationsProblem solving strategies
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems.
106Number problemsProblems with numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy.
107Problem solvingWord Problems with Money
Objective: To solve money word problems using + – x and /
108LengthProblems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
109MassProblems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
110AreaProblems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
111Volume/capacityProblems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
112Geometry-anglesMeasuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
113Geometry-anglesAdjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
114Geometry-anglesComplementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
115StatisticsFrequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
116StatisticsFrequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
117Statistics part 1Relative Frequency
Objective: To extend the frequency distribution table to include a relative frequency column
118StatisticsThe range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
119Statistic-probabilityThe mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
120Statistic-probabilityThe mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
121Statistic-probabilityThe median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
122ExamExam – Year 11 Prevocational
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 12 A Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 12
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2Trigonometry-ratiosTrigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
3Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
4Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
5Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
6Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
7Trigonometry-ratiosUnknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
8Trigonometry-elevationAngles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
9Trigonometry-practicalTrigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
10Trigonometry-ratiosUsing the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
11Trigonometry- ratiosUsing the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
12PythagorasFind the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
13PythagorasPythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
14PythagorasFind the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
15PythagorasCalculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
16Surface areaSurface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
17Surface areaSurface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
18Surface areaSurface area of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
19Surface areaSurface area of pyramids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of pyramids.
20Surface areaSurface area of cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of cones by finding the area or the base ‘p r . ‘and the area of the curved surface ‘ p r l’. The student will also be able to find the slant height ‘l’ given the perpendicul
21Surface areaSurface area of composite solids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of Composite solids.
22Algebraic equationsSolving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
23Algebraic equationsEquations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
24Algebraic equationsEquations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
25Algebra- formulaeEquations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
26Algebra- formulaeChanging the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
27Algebra-inequalitiesSolving Inequalities.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities.
28Algebra-factorisingSimplifying easy algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to simplify algebraic fractions by factorising.
29Absolute value or modulusSolving and graphing inequalities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve inequalities involving one absolute value.
30Geometric transformationsGeometry transformations without matrices: reflection (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use and understand the language used in geometric transformations and perform reflections in a number plane.
31Geometric transformationsGeometry transformations without matrices: translation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform translations in a number plane.
32Geometric transformationsGeometry transformations without matrices: rotation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform and construct rotations.
33Geometric transformationsGeometry transformations without matrices: dilation or enlargement (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform the non-congruent transformation of dilation or emlargement and calculate scale factor.
34Geometric transformationsThe definition and concept of combined transformations resulting in an equivalent single transformation.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will combine reflections and glide transformations to produce single isometric transformations.
35StatisticsRelative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
36StatisticsThe range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
37Statistic-probabilityThe mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
38Statistic-probabilityThe mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
39Statistic-probabilityThe median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
40Statistic-probabilityCumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
41Statistic-probabilityCalculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
42Statistics – grouped dataCalculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
43Statistics using a calculatorStatistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
44Statistics – Range and dispersionRange as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
45Statistics – SpreadMeasures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
46Statistics – Standard deviationStandard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
47Statistics – Standard deviationNormal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
48Statistics – Interquartile rangeMeasures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
49StatisticsStem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
50StatisticsScatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
51Sequences and Series-Compound interestCompound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
52LogicInductive and deductive reasoning
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand and use the terms hypothesis, conclusion, inductive and deductive.
53LogicDefinition and use of counter examples
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to create counter examples to statements.
54LogicIndirect proofs
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use indirect proofs by assuming the opposite of the statement being proved.
55Statistic-probabilityProbability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
56Statistic-probabilityRolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
57Statistic-probabilityExperimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
58Statistic-probabilityTree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
59Statistic-probabilityTree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
60Statistic-probabilityThe complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
61Statistic-probabilityP[A or B] When A and B are both mutually and NOT mutually exclusive
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to distinguish between mutually exclusive and non mutually exclusive events and be able to find the probabilities of both.
62LogicConditional statements (converse, inverse and contrapositive) (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to form related conditional statements.
63Coordinate Geometry-the planeDistance formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the distance between any two points on the number plane and interpret the results.
64Coordinate Geometry-midpoint, slopeMid-point formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the mid point formula and use it practically.
65Coordinate Geometry-gradientGradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
66Coordinate Geometry-gradientGradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
67Coordinate Geometry-straight lineThe straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
68Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc.Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
69Coordinate Geometry-equation of lineGeneral form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
70Coordinate Geometry-interceptSlope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
71Coordinate Geometry-point slopePoint slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
72Simultaneous equationsNumber of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
73Vectors2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
74Linear systemsOptimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
75Linear systemsLinear systems with matrices (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations.
76Linear systemsRow-echelon form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the row-echelon form.
77ExamExam – Year 12 – Maths A
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 12 B Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 12
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2Geometry-parabolaThe parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
3Functions and graphsQuadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
4Functions and graphsGraphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
5Graphing rootsGraphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
6Factors by groupingFactors by grouping.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression.
7Difference of 2 squaresDifference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors.
8Common fact and diffCommon factor and the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares.
9Quadratic trinomialsQuadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive.
10Factorising quadsFactorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will accurately identify the process if the middle term of a quadratic trinomial is negative.
11Factorising quadsFactorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 3.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an increased knowledge on factorising quadratic trinomials and will understand where the 2nd term is positive and the 3rd term is negative.
12Factorising quadsFactorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to factorise all of the possible types of monic quadratic trinomials and specifcally where the 2nd term and 3rd terms are negative.
13Factorising quadsFactorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of factorising any quadratic trinomial.
14Factorising quadsFactorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials – moon method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student know two methods for factorisation of quadratic trinomials including the cross method.
15Sum/diff 2 cubesSum and difference of two cubes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be cognisant of the sum and difference of 2 cubes and be capable of factorising them.
16Algebraic fractionsSimplifying algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be familiar with all of the factorisation methods presented to this point.
17Graphing-polynomialsGraphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
18Graphing-polynomialsGeneral equation of a circle: determine and graph the equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve these types of problems. Working with circles will also help the student in the topic of circle geometry, which tests the student’s skills in logic and reasoning.
19Graphing-cubic curvesGraphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
20Absolute value equationsAbsolute value equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to relate to graphs involving the absolute value function. The student will be capable of graphing the function given its equation and be able to solve for the intersection of an absolute value functio
21Rect.hyperbolaThe rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
22Exponential functionThe exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
23Log functionsLogarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
24FunctionsDefinition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
25FunctionsNotation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
26FunctionsMore on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
27FunctionsDomain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
28FunctionsEvaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
29FunctionsFunctions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
30FunctionsComposition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
31FunctionsInverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
32FunctionsRational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
33FunctionsRational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
34FunctionsParametric equations (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to eliminate the parameter from a set of equations and identify appropriate restrictions on the domain and range.
35FunctionsPolynomial addition etc in combining and simplifying functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have multiple techniques to understand and construct graphs using algebra.
36FunctionsParametric functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some standard parametric forms using trigonometric identities, appreciate the beauty of the the graphs that can be generated and an application to projectile motion.
37Algebra-polynomialsIntroduction to polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand all the terminology associated with polynomials and be able to judge if any algebraic expression is a polynomial or not.
38Algebra-polynomialsThe sum, difference and product of two polynomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add subtract and multiply polynomials and find the degrees of the answers.
39Algebra-polynomialsPolynomials and long division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the long division process with polynomials.
40Remainder theoremThe remainder theorem.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how the remainder theorem works and how it can be applied.
41Remainder theoremMore on remainder theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the remainder theorem and how it can be applied to solve some interesting questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
42Factor theoremThe factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the factor theorem and determine if a term in the form of x minus a is a factor of a given polynomial.
43Factor theoremMore on the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will fully understand the factor theorem and how it can be applied to solve some questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
44Factor theoremComplete factorisations using the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to factorise polynomials of a higher degree than 2 and to find their zeros.
45Polynomial equationsPolynomial equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of solving polynomial equations given in different forms.
46Graphs, polynomialsGraphs of polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to graph polynomials using the zeros of polynomials, the y intercepts and the direction of the curves.
47CalculusLimits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems using limiting sum rule.
48Calculus=1st prinDifferentiation from first principles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able apply the first principles (calculus) formula to find the gradient of a tangent at any point on a continuous curve.
49Calculus=1st prinDifferentiation of y = x to the power of n.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to differentiate a number of expressions involving x raised to the power of n.
50Calculus-differential, integMeaning of dy over dx – equations of tangents and normals.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to apply differentiation and algebra skills to find the equation of the tangent and the normal to a point on a curve.
51Calculus-differential, integFunction of a function rule, product rule, quotient rule.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will understand how to use the chain rule, the product rule and the quotient rule.
52Calculus-differential, integIncreasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the first derivative of various functions, and use it in various situations to identify increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
53CalculusFirst Derivative – turning points and curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first derivative to find and identify the nature of stationary points on a curve.
54Calculus-2nd derivativeThe second derivative – concavity.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to find a second derivative, and use it to find the domain over which a curve is concave up or concave down, as well as any points of inflexion.
55Calculus – Curve sketchingCurve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first and second derivatives to find turning points of a curve, identify maxima and minima, and concavity, then use this information to sketch a curve.
56Calculus – Maxima minimaPractical applications of maxima and minima
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply calculus to a suite of simple maxima or minima problems.
57Trig-reciprocal ratiosReciprocal ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the reciprocal trigonometric ratios of sine, cosine and tan, that is, the cosecant, secant and cotangent ratios.
58Trig complementary anglesComplementary angle results.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to establish the complementary angle results for the sine and cosine ratios and then how to use these results to solve trig equations.
59Trig identitiesTrigonometric identities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify trigonometrical expressions and solve trigonometry equations using the knowledge of trig identities.
60Trig larger anglesAngles of any magnitude
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the trigonometric values of angles of any magnitude by assigning angles to the four quadrants of the circle.
61Trig larger anglesTrigonometric ratios of 0°, 90°, 180°, 270° and 360°
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to find the Trigonometric Ratios of 0, 90, 180, 270 and 360 degrees.
62Graph sineGraphing the trigonometric ratios – I Sine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and draw the sine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
63Graph cosineGraphing the trigonometric ratios – II Cosine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the cosine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
64Graphs tan curveGraphing the trigonometric ratios – III Tangent curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the tan curve.
65Graph reciprocalsGraphing the trigonometric ratios – IV Reciprocal ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the curves of the reciprocal ratios: cosec, sec and cot.
66Trig larger anglesUsing one ratio to find another.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will find other trig ratios given one trig ratio and to work with angles of any magnitude.
67Trig equationsSolving trigonometric equations – Type I.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve simple trig equations with restricted domains.
68Trig equationsSolving trigonometric equations – Type II.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with multiples of theta and restricted domains.
69Trig equationsSolving trigonometric equations – Type III.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with two trig ratios and restricted domains.
70Rules for indices/exponentsAdding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
71Indices/ExponentsSubtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: To subtract indices when dividing powers of the same base
72Rules for indices/exponentsMultiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
73Rules for indices/exponentsMultiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
74Rules for indices/exponentsTerms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
75Rules for indices/exponentsNegative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
76Indices/ExponentsFractional Indices
Objective: To evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices
77Fractional indices/exponentsComplex fractions as indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing complex fractional indices.
78Logarithms-Power of 2Powers of 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to convert between logarithmic statements and index statements to the power of 2.
79Logarithms-Equations and logsEquations of type log x to the base 3 = 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the number from which the logarithm evolves.
80Logarithms-Equations and logsEquations of type log 32 to the base x = 5.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the base from which the number came.
81Logarithms-Log lawsLaws of logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with 5 logarithm laws.
82Logarithms-Log laws expansionUsing the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
83Logarithms-Log laws simplifyingUsing the log laws to simplify expressions involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify logarithmic expressions using the log laws.
84Logarithms-Log laws numbersUsing the log laws to find the logarithms of numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the use of the log laws and be able to do more applications with numerical examples.
85Logarithms-Equations and logsEquations involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations with log terms.
86Logarithms-Logs to solve equationsUsing logarithms to solve equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use logarithms to solve index equations with the assistance of a calculator.
87Logarithms-Change base formulaChange of base formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have seen the change of base formula for logarithms and be capable of using it to change the logarithm of one base to another base.
88Logarithms-Graph-log curveThe graph of the logarithmic curve
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a logarithmic curve to a given base and know the general properties of log curves.
89Logarithms-Log curvesWorking with log curves.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with log curves
90Sequences and SeriesGeneral sequences.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work out a formula from a given number pattern and then be able to find particular terms of that sequence using the formula.
91Sequences and SeriesFinding Tn given Sn.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concept that the sum of n terms of a series minus the sum of n minus one terms will yield the nth term.
92Geometric ProgressionThe geometric progression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is a Geometric Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the G.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
93Geometric ProgressionFinding the position of a term in a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find terms in a geometric progression and how to apply it different types of problems.
94Geometric ProgressionGiven two terms of G.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to solve all problems involving finding the common ratio of a Geometric Progression.
95Sequences and Series-Geometric meansGeometric means.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make a geometric progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of geometric means.
96Sequences and Series-Sum of gpThe sum to n terms of a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas and how to use them to solve problems in summing terms of a Geometric Progression (G.P).
97Sequences and Series-Sigma notationSigma notation
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will be familiar with the sigma notation and how it operates.
98Sequences and Series-Sum-infinityLimiting sum or sum to infinity.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have learnt the formula for the limiting sum of a G.P., the conditions for it to exist and how to apply it to particular problems.
99Sequences and Series-Recurring decimal infinityRecurring decimals and the infinite G.P.
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will have understood how to convert any recurring decimal to a rational number.
100Sequences and Series-Compound interestCompound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
101Sequences and Series-SuperannuationSuperannuation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the method of finding the accumulated amount of a superannuation investment using the sum formula for a G.P.
102Sequences and Series-Time paymentsTime payments.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have examined examples carefully and be capable of setting out the long method of calculating a regular payment for a reducible interest loan.
103Calculus – IntegrationIntegration – anti-differentiation, primitive function
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use rules of integration to find primitives of some simple functions.
104Calculus – Computation areaComputation of an area
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to select an appropriate formula to calculate an area, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and use correct limits in the formula to evaluate an area.
105Calculus – Computation volumesComputation of volumes of revolution
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to choose an appropriate volume formula, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and then calculate a result to a prescribed accuracy.
106Calculus – Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rulesThe Trapezium rule and Simpson’s rule
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to calculate sub-intervals, set up a table of values, then apply the Trapezoidal Rule, or Simpson’s Rule to approximate an area beneath a curve.
107ExamExam – Year 12 – Maths B
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 12 B and C Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Study PlanStudy plan – Year 12
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2Geometry-parabolaThe parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
3Functions and graphsQuadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
4Functions and graphsGraphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
5Graphing rootsGraphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
6Factors by groupingFactors by grouping.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression.
7Difference of 2 squaresDifference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors.
8Common fact and diffCommon factor and the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares.
9Quadratic trinomialsQuadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive.
10Factorising quadsFactorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will accurately identify the process if the middle term of a quadratic trinomial is negative.
11Factorising quadsFactorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 3.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an increased knowledge on factorising quadratic trinomials and will understand where the 2nd term is positive and the 3rd term is negative.
12Factorising quadsFactorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to factorise all of the possible types of monic quadratic trinomials and specifcally where the 2nd term and 3rd terms are negative.
13Factorising quadsFactorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of factorising any quadratic trinomial.
14Factorising quadsFactorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials – moon method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student know two methods for factorisation of quadratic trinomials including the cross method.
15Sum/diff 2 cubesSum and difference of two cubes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be cognisant of the sum and difference of 2 cubes and be capable of factorising them.
16Algebraic fractionsSimplifying algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be familiar with all of the factorisation methods presented to this point.
17Graphing-polynomialsGraphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
18Graphing-polynomialsGeneral equation of a circle: determine and graph the equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve these types of problems. Working with circles will also help the student in the topic of circle geometry, which tests the student’s skills in logic and reasoning.
19Graphing-cubic curvesGraphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
20Absolute value equationsAbsolute value equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to relate to graphs involving the absolute value function. The student will be capable of graphing the function given its equation and be able to solve for the intersection of an absolute value functio
21Rect.hyperbolaThe rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
22Exponential functionThe exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
23Log functionsLogarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
24FunctionsDefinition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
25FunctionsNotation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
26FunctionsMore on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
27FunctionsDomain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
28FunctionsEvaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
29FunctionsFunctions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
30FunctionsComposition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
31FunctionsInverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
32FunctionsRational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
33FunctionsRational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
34FunctionsParametric equations (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to eliminate the parameter from a set of equations and identify appropriate restrictions on the domain and range.
35FunctionsPolynomial addition etc in combining and simplifying functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have multiple techniques to understand and construct graphs using algebra.
36FunctionsParametric functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some standard parametric forms using trigonometric identities, appreciate the beauty of the the graphs that can be generated and an application to projectile motion.
37Algebra-polynomialsIntroduction to polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand all the terminology associated with polynomials and be able to judge if any algebraic expression is a polynomial or not.
38Algebra-polynomialsThe sum, difference and product of two polynomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add subtract and multiply polynomials and find the degrees of the answers.
39Algebra-polynomialsPolynomials and long division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the long division process with polynomials.
40Remainder theoremThe remainder theorem.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how the remainder theorem works and how it can be applied.
41Remainder theoremMore on remainder theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the remainder theorem and how it can be applied to solve some interesting questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
42Factor theoremThe factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the factor theorem and determine if a term in the form of x minus a is a factor of a given polynomial.
43Factor theoremMore on the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will fully understand the factor theorem and how it can be applied to solve some questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
44Factor theoremComplete factorisations using the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to factorise polynomials of a higher degree than 2 and to find their zeros.
45Polynomial equationsPolynomial equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of solving polynomial equations given in different forms.
46Graphs, polynomialsGraphs of polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to graph polynomials using the zeros of polynomials, the y intercepts and the direction of the curves.
47CalculusLimits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems using limiting sum rule.
48Calculus=1st prinDifferentiation from first principles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able apply the first principles (calculus) formula to find the gradient of a tangent at any point on a continuous curve.
49Calculus=1st prinDifferentiation of y = x to the power of n.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to differentiate a number of expressions involving x raised to the power of n.
50Calculus-differential, integMeaning of dy over dx – equations of tangents and normals.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to apply differentiation and algebra skills to find the equation of the tangent and the normal to a point on a curve.
51Calculus-differential, integFunction of a function rule, product rule, quotient rule.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will understand how to use the chain rule, the product rule and the quotient rule.
52Calculus-differential, integIncreasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the first derivative of various functions, and use it in various situations to identify increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
53CalculusFirst Derivative – turning points and curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first derivative to find and identify the nature of stationary points on a curve.
54Calculus-2nd derivativeThe second derivative – concavity.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to find a second derivative, and use it to find the domain over which a curve is concave up or concave down, as well as any points of inflexion.
55Calculus – Curve sketchingCurve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first and second derivatives to find turning points of a curve, identify maxima and minima, and concavity, then use this information to sketch a curve.
56Calculus – Maxima minimaPractical applications of maxima and minima
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply calculus to a suite of simple maxima or minima problems.
57Logarithms-Power of 2Powers of 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to convert between logarithmic statements and index statements to the power of 2.
58Logarithms-Equations and logsEquations of type log x to the base 3 = 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the number from which the logarithm evolves.
59Logarithms-Equations and logsEquations of type log 32 to the base x = 5.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the base from which the number came.
60Logarithms-Log lawsLaws of logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with 5 logarithm laws.
61Logarithms-Log laws expansionUsing the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
62Logarithms-Log laws simplifyingUsing the log laws to simplify expressions involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify logarithmic expressions using the log laws.
63Logarithms-Log laws numbersUsing the log laws to find the logarithms of numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the use of the log laws and be able to do more applications with numerical examples.
64Logarithms-Equations and logsEquations involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations with log terms.
65Logarithms-Logs to solve equationsUsing logarithms to solve equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use logarithms to solve index equations with the assistance of a calculator.
66Logarithms-Change base formulaChange of base formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have seen the change of base formula for logarithms and be capable of using it to change the logarithm of one base to another base.
67Logarithms-Graph-log curveThe graph of the logarithmic curve
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a logarithmic curve to a given base and know the general properties of log curves.
68Logarithms-Log curvesWorking with log curves.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with log curves
69Sequences and Series-Recurring decimal infinityRecurring decimals and the infinite G.P.
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will have understood how to convert any recurring decimal to a rational number.
70Sequences and Series-Compound interestCompound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
71Sequences and Series-SuperannuationSuperannuation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the method of finding the accumulated amount of a superannuation investment using the sum formula for a G.P.
72Sequences and Series-Time paymentsTime payments.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have examined examples carefully and be capable of setting out the long method of calculating a regular payment for a reducible interest loan.
73Sequences and SeriesApplications of arithmetic sequences
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of problems involving practical situations with arithmetic series.
74Calculus – IntegrationIntegration – anti-differentiation, primitive function
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use rules of integration to find primitives of some simple functions.
75Calculus – Computation areaComputation of an area
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to select an appropriate formula to calculate an area, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and use correct limits in the formula to evaluate an area.
76Calculus – Computation volumesComputation of volumes of revolution
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to choose an appropriate volume formula, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and then calculate a result to a prescribed accuracy.
77Calculus – Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rulesThe Trapezium rule and Simpson’s rule
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to calculate sub-intervals, set up a table of values, then apply the Trapezoidal Rule, or Simpson’s Rule to approximate an area beneath a curve.
78Statistics – SpreadMeasures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
79Statistics – Standard deviationStandard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
80Statistics – Standard deviationNormal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
81Statistics – Interquartile rangeMeasures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
82StatisticsStem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
83StatisticsScatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
84Number theory – setsNumber sets and their members
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the notation used with sets and the subsets of the real number system.
85Number theory – operationsProperties of real numbers using addition and multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know and use the closure, identity, commutative, associative, identity and distributive properties for addition and multiplication.
86Number theory – equationsTransformations that produce equivalent equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know and use the correct terms to describe the processes in solving equations.
87LogicInductive and deductive reasoning
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand and use the terms hypothesis, conclusion, inductive and deductive.
88LogicDefinition and use of counter examples
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to create counter examples to statements.
89LogicIndirect proofs
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use indirect proofs by assuming the opposite of the statement being proved.
90LogicMathematical induction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform the process of mathematical induction for simple series.
91LogicConditional statements (converse, inverse and contrapositive) (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to form related conditional statements.
92TranslationsTransformations – reflections
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to take a pre-image and using the appropriate techniques, accurately show its image after reflection.
93Geometric transformationsGeometry transformations without matrices: reflection (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use and understand the language used in geometric transformations and perform reflections in a number plane.
94Geometric transformationsGeometry transformations without matrices: translation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform translations in a number plane.
95Geometric transformationsGeometry transformations without matrices: rotation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform and construct rotations.
96Geometric transformationsGeometry transformations without matrices: dilation or enlargement (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform the non-congruent transformation of dilation or emlargement and calculate scale factor.
97Geometric transformationsThe definition and concept of combined transformations resulting in an equivalent single transformation.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will combine reflections and glide transformations to produce single isometric transformations.
98Logarithms-Complex numbersImaginary numbers and standard form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for addition and subtraction.
99Logarithms-Complex numbersComplex numbers – multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
100Logarithms-Complex numbersPlotting complex number and graphical representation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the argand diagram to assist in the addition and subtraction of complex numbers.
101Logarithms-Complex numbersAbsolute value
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the absolute value or modulus of complex numbers
102Logarithms-Complex numbersTrigonometric form of a complex number
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will write complex numbers in trigonometric or polar form. This may also be known as mod-ard form.
103Logarithms-Complex numbersMultiplication and division of complex numbers in trig form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the trig form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
104Logarithms-Complex numbersDeMoivre’s theorem (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use DeMoivre’s theorem to find powers of complex numbers in trig form.
105Logarithms-Complex numbersThe nth root of real and complex numbers (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use DeMoivre’s theorem to find roots of complex numbers in trig form.
106Logarithms-Complex numbersFundamental theorem of algebra (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and use the fundamental theorem of algebra to find factors for polynomials with real coefficients over the complex number field.
107MatricesBasic concepts – Matrices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have had an introduction to matrices
108MatricesAddition and subtraction of matrices
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to recognise when addition and subtraction of matrices is possible, and perform these operations.
109MatricesScalar matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to perform scalar multiplication of a matrix.
110MatricesMultiplication of one matrix by another matrix
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to state whether matrix by matrix multiplication is possible, predict the order of the answer matrix, and then perform matrix by matrix multiplication.
111MatricesTranslation in the number plane
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to place ordered pairs into a matrix, then perform translation by addition using a transformation matrix, then extract ordered pairs from an answer matrix.
112MatricesTranslation by matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert ordered pairs to elements of a matrix, multiply matrices together, where possible, and interpret the answer matrix on a number plane.
113TransformationsSpecial transformations – reflections, rotations and enlargements.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform transformations: to rotate, reflect and change the size of various shapes and or points where applicable.
114VectorsVectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent a vector in matrix and diagrammatic form, as well as add two vectors using matrices and/or a diagram.
115Simultaneous equationsNumber of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
116Vectors2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
117Linear systemsOptimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
118Linear systemsLinear systems with matrices (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations.
119Linear systemsRow-echelon form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the row-echelon form.
120Linear systemsGauss Jordan elimination method (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the Gauss Jordan elimination method.
121Conic sectionsIntroduction to conic sections and their general equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the conic section from the coefficients of the equation.
122Conic sectionsThe parabola x. = 4ay
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the focus and directrix for a parabola given in standard form.
123Conic sectionsCircles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the radius of a circle given in standard form.
124Conic sectionsEllipses
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices and axes of an ellipse.
125Conic sectionsHyperbola
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices, axes and asymptotes of a hyperbola.
126TrigonometrySin(A+B) etc sum and difference identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using the reference triangles for 30, 45 and 60 degrees with the sum and difference of angles to find additional exact values of trigonometric ratios.
127TrigonometryDouble angle formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the double angle trig identities.
128TrigonometryHalf angle identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the power reducing formulas and the half angle trig identities.
129Trigonometryt Formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations using the t substitution.
130ExamExam – Year 12 – Maths B & C
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 12 Prevocational Mathematics

#TOPICTITLE
1Self AssessmentSelf Assessment – Year 12 Prevocational
Objective: Assessment
2AreaArea of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
3AreaArea of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
4AreaArea of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
5VolumeVolume of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume.
6VolumeVolume of pyramids and cones.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of right pyramids and cones, and calculate the volume of a variety of pyramids and cones.
7Measurement – Advanced volumeComposite Solids
Objective: To calculate the volume of composite figures using appropriate formulae
8FractionsBODMAS
Objective: To calculate answers for fraction and mixed number questions using BODMAS
9Surface areaSurface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
10Surface areaSurface Area of a Triangular/Trapezoidal Prism
Objective: To calculate the surface area of triangular and trapezoidal prisms
11Geometry-anglesVertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
12Geometry-anglesAngles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
13Geometry-trianglesAngle sum of a triangle
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems.
14Special trianglesSpecial triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify an equilateral and an isosceles triangle and solve geometry questions involving these triangles.
15Geometry-quadrilateralsQuadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to find missing angles by using the fact that a quadrilateral’s angle sum is 360 degrees.
16PythagorasFind the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
17PythagorasPythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
18Uniform motionAverage speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units for speed, distance and time.
19Uniform motionUsing subscripted variables
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, distance and time.
20Uniform motionUniform motion with equal distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, equal distances and time.
21Uniform motionUniform motion adding the distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, adding distances for total distance and time.
22Uniform motionUniform Motion With Unequal Distances or Time
Objective: To solve motion problems where either distance or time are different
23Uniform motionUniform motion of all types
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use all types of subscripted variables for calculations to determine speed, distance and time.
24Statistic-probabilityCumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
25Statistics part 1Calculating the Mean from a Frequency Distribution
Objective: To determine averages (mean, median and mode) from cumulative frequency polygons
26Statistics – grouped dataCalculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
27Statistics using a calculatorStatistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
28Statistics – Range and dispersionRange as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
29Statistics – SpreadMeasures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
30Statistics – Standard deviationStandard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
31Statistics – Standard deviationNormal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
32Statistics – Interquartile rangeMeasures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
33StatisticsStem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
34StatisticsScatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
35Sequences and Series-Compound interestCompound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
36ExamExam – Year 12 Prevocational
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Literacy

Australian National Curriculum Foundation - Kindergarten Literacy

#TOPICTITLE
1It’s time to learn your A B C!The Alphabet!
Objective: Students will practise reading the letters of the alphabet and practise recognition of: a, b, c, d, e, f.
2It’s time to learn your A B C!1 2 3 – It’s A B C!
Objective: Students will hear and practise saying the alphabet and the numbers 1-11.
3It’s time to learn your A B C!How do you spell that?
Objective: Students will develop their letter recognition skills by listening to a conversation. They will be able to identify the letters by name.
4It’s time to learn your A B C!It’s time!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short text about asking and telling the time on the hour and half hour.
5It’s time to learn your A B C!What time is it?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by listening to a conversation about asking and telling the time. They will practise using the key sentences.
6It’s time to learn your A B C!‘A’ sounds like …!
Objective: Students will listen to, discriminate between and practise the sounds of the letters a, b, c, d, e, f.
7Hello! How are you?Hello! I’m Lulu.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story in which they will meet some new friends.
8Hello! How are you?My name is Jack!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story in which new friends and new vocabulary are introduced.
9Eight Purple Stars!Ten Little Pandas
Objective: Students will read a picture story and practise the numbers 1-10.
10Eight Purple Stars!What colour is it?
Objective: Students will read and practise the words for basic colours. They will learn to answer the question: ‘What colour is …?’ and reply with ‘It’s …’.
11Fun at SchoolClose the door, please!
Objective: Students will develop their listening and speaking skills. They will read and hear a picture story, and practise classroom instructions.
12Fun at SchoolThis is my father and mother.
Objective: Students will develop their reading skills. They will read a picture story and become familiar with ‘This is …’ and ‘That is …’.
13What’s this?It’s my green eraser!
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story in which some possessive pronouns are used. They will also become familiar with the questions: ‘What’s this?’ and ‘What’s that?’.
14What’s this?What’s in the box?
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will learn to ask and answer the question ‘Is it a …?’.
15A New Boy at SchoolA Letter from Peter
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also revise colours and numbers, and learn to talk about their families.
16A New Boy at SchoolWhere’s my dog?
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also become familiar with some prepositions.
17My FamilyWhere’s the red kite?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading and listening to a picture story. They will also practise the use of ‘in’, ‘on’ and ‘under’.
18My FamilyMy Family Tree
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about the family. They will increase their vocabulary for family relationships and occupations, and they will learn to use ‘this’ and ‘that’.
19About PeopleThat’s his cow!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about occupations. They will also learn about the possessive adjectives ‘his’, ‘her’ and ‘their’.
20About PeopleThese are my feet.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills and vocabulary by reading a text about the parts of the body. They will practise using ‘this’ and ‘these’, and learn to form plurals.
21Animal Mania!What animal is that?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about animals. Students will practise asking and answering questions, and they will revise colours and numbers.
22Animal Mania!A Very Tall Giraffe
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about animals in which more adjectives are used.
23We like to play games.Holidays!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story about fun activities to do in the holidays. Students will practise using ‘let’s’ and learn the days of the week.
24We like to play games.What’s your favourite?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story about activities they like to do. They will learn to talk about their preferences.
25Do you like hamburgers?At a Café
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story about food preferences.
26Do you like hamburgers?This is Bobby.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story. They will also learn to ask questions about likes and dislikes.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 1 Literacy

#TOPICTITLE
1PunctuationSentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
2SentencesThe Sentence
Objective: To identify and use complete sentences.
3CapitalisationCapital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
4PunctuationCommas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
5Common NounsCommon Nouns
Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing.
6SentencesThe Sentence
Objective: To identify and use complete sentences.
7Parts of Speech Part hArticles and Demonstratives
Objective: To identify and use articles and demonstratives correctly.
8VerbsSimple Verbs
Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership.
9Common NounsCommon Nouns
Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing.
10PronounsPronouns
Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun.
11VerbsSimple Verbs
Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership.
12AdjectivesAdjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
13AdverbsAdverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
14It’s time to learn how to tell the time!No school! It’s Sunday!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a short text about daily routines.
15It’s time to learn how to tell the time!Where are my clothes?
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a short text about items of clothing. They will learn about the prepositions – ‘on’, ‘under’, ‘in’.
16School and PlayI have lots of subjects!
Objective: Students will practise reading, and saying words and simple sentences to describe school subjects and the days of the week.
17School and PlayOn the Weekend
Objective: Students will practise reading and recognising simple sentences about weekend activities.
18It’s Christmas time!It’s time for Maths!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short text in which quarter past, quarter to, 5 past, 5 to, 10 past and 10 to the hour are used.
19It’s Christmas time!Festivals are fun!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short text about Christmas and Chinese New Year.
20I walk in the summer.The Seasons
Objective: Students will develop their reading skills and practise new words to describe the seasons.
21I walk in the summer.How do you go to school?
Objective: Students will develop their reading skills and practise new words that describe modes of transport. They will also ask and answer questions about transport to different places.
22What’s the weather like today?Have you got a ‘W’?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which ‘have got’ is used. They will also revise the letters of the alphabet and learn some new ones.
23What’s the weather like today?It’s a sunny day!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story about the weather.
24What are you doing now?Shhhh! Dad is sleeping!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the present continuous tense is used.
25What are you doing now?We are having a picnic!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the present continuous tense is used to ask and answer questions.
26They’re usually in the lounge room.Hide and Seek
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story about finding people.
27They’re usually in the lounge room.An Unusual Day
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the simple present and the continuous present tenses are used. They will also learn the little words that help to sequence a story.
28Left! Right! Let’s go!Where’s the shop?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which simple directions are given using the imperative.
29Left! Right! Let’s go!Ladies and Gentlemen!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the present continuous tense is used to talk about a concert.
30Up, down and around we go!Roller-coaster Ride
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which routes are described using the present continuous tense.
31Up, down and around we go!Catch that car!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story which focuses on street directions and places.
32SentencesThe Sentence
Objective: To identify and use complete sentences.
33Common ErrorsCommon Errors in spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
34SpellingSpelling
Objective: To use the ‘Look, Say, Write’ method for learning spelling. Plus 300 spelling words.
35Basic Dictionary UseBasic Dictionary Use
Objective: To find words arranged alphabetically and identify word meanings in dictionaries.
36CapitalisationCapital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
37PunctuationSentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 2 Literacy

#TOPICTITLE
1PunctuationCommas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
2CapitalisationCapital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
3NounsProper Nouns
Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title.
4Parts of Speech Part bConjunctions
Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly.
5Conjunctions – SentencesConjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
6Common NounsCommon Nouns
Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing.
7NounsProper Nouns
Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title.
8NounsCollective and Abstract Nouns
Objective: To identify and use collective and abstract nouns.
9CapitalisationCapital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
10SpellingSpelling
Objective: To use the ‘Look, Say, Write’ method for learning spelling. Plus 300 spelling words.
11Spelling SkillsSyllabification
Objective: To improve spelling by dividing words correctly into syllables.
12PrefixesPrefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
13SuffixesSuffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
14SpellingSpelling
Objective: To use the ‘Look, Say, Write’ method for learning spelling. Plus 300 spelling words.
15We’re very busy.Fast Food
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading what Peter and Chen say about fast food. They will also practise using the present tense, and asking and answering questions using ‘do’.
16We’re very busy.On the farm
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading, in which the present continuous tense is used.
17I can’t do that!This is a great park!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a story about a park. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘this’ and ‘these’ for things that are near and ‘that’ and ‘those’ for things that are far away.
18I can’t do that!I can speak English!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a short speech about what a person ‘can’ and ‘can’t’ do.
19Can I look at your new kite?Can I help you?
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text using ‘can’ and ‘can’t’ to make offers and requests.
20Can I look at your new kite?I’ve got a secret!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘has’ and ‘have got’ are used to talk about possessions.
21Oh, no! Not the Doctor!Doctor, what have I got?
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text about illnesses.
22Oh, no! Not the Doctor!There is a zoo in Sydney!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘There is’ and ‘There are’ in relation to zoo animals is used.
23It’s all in the future!One World, One Dream
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘going to’ is used to talk about the future.
24It’s all in the future!You are going to have a great time!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘going to’ is used to make future plans.
25Maybe she’ll be funny!My animal friends are wonderful!
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will revise adjectives that describe personality.
26Maybe she’ll be funny!What will Fido do next?
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘will’ to express a future action.
27First we’ll see a big city.Sydney: It’s special!
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will focus on the use of adjectives to describe cities.
28First we’ll see a big city.Then we’ll eat it!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘will’ when describing a process.
29We need to take a metal pan.What’s it made of?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story about what things are made of. They will also revise prepositions of location.
30We need to take a metal pan.They want to go camping.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story about a camping trip. They will also become familiar with the terms ‘need to’ and ‘want to’.
31First we’ll go to the eighth floor.Let’s make pancakes!
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, an illustrated recipe. They will also revise words that help them tell a story – ‘First’, ‘Then’, ‘Next’, ‘After that’ and ‘Finally’.
32First we’ll go to the eighth floor.Who’s shopping at Sunsets?
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story about shopping in a department store. They will also revise some prepositions and learn some more in simple phrases.
33On Monday I’ll buy new jeans.Whose Shoes?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture poem about shopping. They will also revise colours and pronouns.
34On Monday I’ll buy new jeans.Chen’s Holiday Plans
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short story about Chen’s plans for his holidays. They will also practise verbs.
35PunctuationSentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
36Basic Dictionary UseBasic Dictionary Use
Objective: To find words arranged alphabetically and identify word meanings in dictionaries.
37CapitalisationCapital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 3 Literacy

#TOPICTITLE
1Modal VerbsModal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
2VerbsSimple Verbs
Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership.
3AdverbsAdverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
4Common NounsCommon Nouns
Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing.
5NounsProper Nouns
Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title.
6NounsCollective and Abstract Nouns
Objective: To identify and use collective and abstract nouns.
7Let’s hit the beach!Modals of obligation
Objective: Learn about modals of obligation.
8Let’s hit the beach!Imperatives
Objective: Learn how to use imperatives.
9ContractionsContractions
Objective: To identify and use contractions.
10Apostrophe – PossessionApostrophe – Possession
Objective: To use the apostrophe of possession correctly.
11ClausesClauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
12Sentence Structure Part aSubject and Predicate
Objective: To identify the subject and predicate within a sentence and to understand they are the two main parts of a sentence.
13Thanks and goodbyeTime clauses
Objective: Learn how to use time clauses.
14VerbsSimple Verbs
Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership.
15VerbsVerbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
16Simple and Compound VerbsSimple and Compound Verbs
Objective: To identify and use simple and compound verbs.
17Auxiliary VerbsAuxiliary Verbs
Objective: To identify and use auxiliary verbs within compound verbs.
18Regular and Irregular VerbsRegular and Irregular Verbs
Objective: To identify and use regular and irregular verbs in the present and past tense.
19Verbs – InfinitivesVerbs – Infinitives
Objective: To identify and use the infinitive form of the verb.
20What’s Homestay?Simple Present
Objective: Learn the correct structure for the simple present.
21Setting offPresent perfect
Objective: Learn the correct structure for the present perfect.
22Amazing Aussie animalsPresent continuous
Objective: Learn about the present continuous tense.
23Amazing Aussie animalsPast continuous
Objective: Learn about the past continuous tense.
24Big day out!The future with ‘will’ and ‘going to’
Objective: Learn the uses of ‘will’ and ‘going to’ to talk about the future.
25Modal VerbsModal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
26AdverbsAdverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
27Amazing Aussie animalsGiving facts and opinions
Objective: Present phrases that ask for and give opinions.
28Thanks and goodbyeTalking about feelings
Objective: Present constructions for talking about feelings.
29What do you like to do?Adverbs of frequency
Objective: Learn about the past continuous tense.
30Spelling SkillsSpelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
31Vowels and ConsonantsVowels and Consonants
Objective: To identify and use vowels and consonants.
32VowelsVowels – Long and Short
Objective: To identify long and short vowel sounds, and their use.
33PluralsPlurals 1 – simple
Objective: To form plurals (more than one) by adding ‘s’ and ‘es’ correctly.
34PluralsPlurals 2 – special rules
Objective: To form plurals with special rules: words ending in ‘y’ and ‘f’.
35Homonyms – Homophones and HomographsHomonyms – Homophones and Homographs
Objective: To identify and use correctly homonyms, both homophones and homographs.
36Spelling SkillsSpelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
37What do you like to do?Expressing likes and dislikes
Objective: Present phrases used to express likes and dislikes.
38Other Places and Other TimesA New Penfriend
Objective: Students will develop their reading comprehensions skills by reading a letter of introduction to a penfriend. They will also practise the present continuous tense and become familiar with vocabulary about different nationalities.
39Other Places and Other TimesWill we have robots?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which the future tense is used.
40Commas 2Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
41Colons and Semi-ColonsColons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
42Homonyms – Homophones and HomographsHomonyms – Homophones and Homographs
Objective: To identify and use correctly homonyms, both homophones and homographs.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 4 Literacy

#TOPICTITLE
1Advanced Dictionary UseAdvanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
2Plurals of Foreign NounsPlurals 5 – Foreign
Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns.
3Amazing Aussie animalsGiving facts and opinions
Objective: Present phrases that ask for and give opinions.
4Thanks and goodbyeTalking about feelings
Objective: Present constructions for talking about feelings.
5PronounsPronouns
Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun.
6PronounsPronouns 2
Objective: To recognise and use personal, possessive and relative pronouns.
7Parts of Speech Part bConjunctions
Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly.
8PhrasesPhrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
9Conjunctions – SentencesConjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
10Sentence ImprovementSentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
11BBQ Party!Sequence markers
Objective: Learn the words used in sequences or ordering.
12Punctuation Skills Part bQuotation Marks
Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech.
13Parts of Speech Part aPrepositions
Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly.
14AdverbsAdverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
15PhrasesPhrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
16AdjectivesAdjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
17A new homePrepositions of location
Objective: Learn about prepositions of location.
18Here we are!Adjectives
Objective: Learn the use of adjectives.
19Punctuation Skills Part bQuotation Marks
Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech.
20Parts of Speech Part aPrepositions
Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly.
21AdverbsAdverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
22PhrasesPhrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
23A new homePrepositions of location
Objective: Learn about prepositions of location.
24Plurals of Foreign NounsPlurals 5 – Foreign
Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns.
25Advanced Dictionary UseAdvanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
26VowelsVowels – Long and Short
Objective: To identify long and short vowel sounds, and their use.
27Homonyms – Homophones and HomographsHomonyms – Homophones and Homographs
Objective: To identify and use correctly homonyms, both homophones and homographs.
28Common ErrorsCommon Errors in spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
29AdjectivesAdjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
30AdverbsAdverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
31AdjectivesAdjectives – from Nouns and Verbs
Objective: To create adjectives from nouns and verbs. E.g. China – Chinese
32AdjectivesAdjectives – Comparatives and Superlatives
Objective: To identify and use comparative and superlative adjectives.
33Here we are!Comparatives and superlatives
Objective: Learn how to use comparatives and superlatives in English.
34Setting offQuestions
Objective: Learn the correct structure for forming yes/no questions. Learn the correct structure for forming wh questions.
35Here we are!Asking for repetition
Objective: Learn how to ask someone to repeat something in English.
36A new homeOffers and requests
Objective: Present the phrases used to make offers and requests.
37Amazing Aussie animalsGiving facts and opinions
Objective: Present phrases that ask for and give opinions.
38There weren’t many …There weren’t any flowers!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise using the simple past tense of the verb ‘to be’.
39There weren’t many …A Shopping List
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise asking questions using ‘How much …’ and ‘How many …’.
40It couldn’t be mine!Uncle Bill said we could!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise using ‘could’ and ‘couldn’t’ to refer to past events.
41It couldn’t be mine!The Riding Lesson
Objective: Students will build vocabulary, answer comprehension questions and practise using possessive pronouns and adjectives.
42Clean up Australia!Too much rubbish!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and reading comprehension skills. They will also practise using ‘too much’, ‘too many’ and ‘enough’.
43Clean up Australia!Sports Report
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and reading comprehension skills. They will also practise using the adverbs ‘well’ and ‘badly’.
44Friends all over the WorldNow I can do it by myself.
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills. They will practise using ‘too much’, ‘too many’ and ‘enough’.
45Friends all over the WorldA Letter to a Pen Pal
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their comprehension skills and practise using the simple present tense.
46What’s the problem?What’s the matter?
Objective: Students will read and comprehend a passage in which words are used to describe feelings.
47What’s the problem?A School Outing
Objective: Students will read and comprehend a notice. They will learn about the use of ‘should’ and ‘shouldn’t’.
48When I was YoungLife used to be different.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, an interview. They will learn how to describe finished activities using ‘used to’.
49When I was YoungHave you tidied your room?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a rhyme. They will also learn the imperfect tense and its use.
50Space and TimeWe’ve done our research.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will learn some irregular verbs in the present perfect tense.
51Space and TimeWe’ve written a poem!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a rhyme. They will learn more irregular verbs in the present perfect tense.
52Choices and PlacesA New Jacket
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which preferences are discussed and comparisons are made.
53Choices and PlacesHe has travelled a lot.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which the present perfect and the simple past tenses are used.
54What’s the best way to do it?A Text Message
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text which focuses on the use of ‘have to’ and adverbs of time.
55What’s the best way to do it?What will we make?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which the children discuss a project.
56Class CampDear Parents, …
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a letter which uses a variety of verb tenses.
57Class CampA Postcard from Kate
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading an informal letter in which the simple past tense of the verb is used.
58Commas 2Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
59Sentence ImprovementSentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
60Vocabulary DevelopmentVocabulary
Objective: To identify and use better words than ‘got’ and ‘said’.
61Parts of Speech Part aPrepositions
Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly.
62AdverbsAdverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
63PhrasesPhrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
64AdjectivesAdjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
65Variety of ExpressionSentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
66Spelling SkillsWord Usage
Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning.
67Colons and Semi-ColonsColons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
68CapitalisationCapital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
69PunctuationSentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
70CapitalisationCapital Letters 2
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: in titles and letters.
71PunctuationCommas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
72Common ErrorsCommon Errors in spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
73Common ErrorsCommon Errors in writing
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
74Common ErrorsCommon Errors in verb usage, spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
75Spelling SkillsWord Usage
Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning.
76Vocabulary DevelopmentVocabulary
Objective: To identify and use better words than ‘got’ and ‘said’.
77Sentence ImprovementSentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 5 Literacy

#TOPICTITLE
1Advanced Dictionary UseAdvanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
2NounsProper Nouns
Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title.
3Apostrophe – PossessionApostrophe – Possession
Objective: To use the apostrophe of possession correctly.
4ClausesClauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
5Sentence ImprovementSentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
6Variety of ExpressionSentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
7Sentence Structure Part aSubject and Predicate
Objective: To identify the subject and predicate within a sentence and to understand they are the two main parts of a sentence.
8AdjectivesAdjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
9PhrasesPhrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
10Sentence ImprovementSentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
11Variety of ExpressionSentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
12Thanks and goodbyeAdjectives
Objective: Learn the use of adjectives.
13PrefixesPrefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
14SuffixesSuffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
15Advanced Dictionary UseAdvanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
16PluralsPlurals 3 – Unusual
Objective: To create unusual plurals: for words ending in ‘o'; by changing the vowels or by adding letters.
17PluralsPlurals 4 – Unusual
Objective: To use nouns whose singular and plural forms are the same. To use compound noun plurals.
18Plurals of Foreign NounsPlurals 5 – Foreign
Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns.
19Similes and MetaphorsSimiles and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
20Figurative LanguageSymbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
21Figurative LanguageOnomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
22Review of Figures of SpeechReview of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
23Similes and MetaphorsSimiles and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
24Figurative LanguageSymbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
25Figurative LanguageOnomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
26Review of Figures of SpeechReview of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
27Verbs – Active and Passive voiceVerbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
28There’s a …It’s famous!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise using the verb ‘to be’.
29There’s a …There are lots of things in my town.
Objective: Students will increase their reading comprehension skills and their vocabulary. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘There is …’ and ‘There are …’.
30Hobbies and FestivalsCollecting things
Objective: Students will develop their reading skills and increase their vocabulary. They will learn the verb ‘to have’. They will also learn to use ‘this’ and ‘these’ correctly.
31Hobbies and FestivalsMy favourite festival
Objective: Students will build vocabulary; begin to use conjunctions ‘and’, ‘but’ or ‘because’.
32What can you do?Letter to a penfriend
Objective: Students will be able to read and understand an informal letter and use the present tense of ‘can’ and ‘can’t’.
33What can you do?Have you got everything?
Objective: Students will read and comprehend a written text using ‘have’, ‘haven’t got’, ‘but’ or ‘and’.
34A visit to the ZooAbout Koalas
Objective: Students will be able to answer questions about the text, identify the target language point ‘like’ + the infinitive) and distinguish between simple facts and opinions.
35A visit to the ZooI’m a zookeeper.
Objective: Students will be able to answer comprehension questions on reading, increase their vocabulary and use the frequency adverbs, ‘always’, ‘sometimes’, ‘often’ and ‘never’.
36What do you want to do?Big Dreams
Objective: Students will be able to answer comprehension questions, increase their vocabulary and be able to use ‘want’ + the infinitive in positive and negative sentences, and in a question.
37What do you want to do?Fruit Bowl
Objective: Students will be able to read and understand the text, to answer questions and to notice the use of the imperative form.
38It’s going to be fun!It’s going to be fantastic!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a story. They will learn how to talk about the future using the verb ‘to go + the infinitive’.
39It’s going to be fun!What’s on the menu?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading various menus. They will also learn to ask questions politely.
40We are all doing things!I’m having a great time!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a letter which focuses on the use of the present continuous tense.
41We are all doing things!Who can help me?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which requests for help are made.
42To Australia and Back!Getting There!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about travel plans. They will also learn about coordinate conjunctions.
43To Australia and Back!I came back!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which Chen talks about going home to China. They will also revise the simple past tense.
44Famous PeopleBruce Lee
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about Bruce Lee. They will also practise the use of the simple past tense and learn more irregular verbs.
45Famous PeopleAlexander Bell
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about Alexander Bell. They will also learn how to use ‘could’ and ‘couldn’t’, and review questions using ‘Wh’ words.
46Finding Buster!Finding Buster! – A Movie Review
Objective: Students will develop their reading comprehension skills and increase their vocabulary by reading a movie review. They will also learn how to use the conjunction ‘because’ to answer ‘why’ questions.
47Finding Buster!I’m going to be busy!
Objective: Students will develop their reading comprehension skills by reading a story about plans for the weekend. They will revise the use of the verb ‘to go’ in the present tense + the infinitive to talk about the future.
48MnemonicsSpelling – Mnemonics
Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling.
49Essay Writing 2Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
50CapitalisationCapital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
51PunctuationSentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
52CapitalisationCapital Letters 2
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: in titles and letters.
53PunctuationCommas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
54Common ErrorsCommon Errors in spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
55Common ErrorsCommon Errors in writing
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
56Common ErrorsCommon Errors in verb usage, spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
57Spelling SkillsWord Usage
Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning.
58Vocabulary DevelopmentVocabulary
Objective: To identify and use better words than ‘got’ and ‘said’.
59Sentence ImprovementSentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
60Commas 2Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
61Parts of Speech Part bConjunctions
Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly.
62Conjunctions – SentencesConjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
63Verbs – Active and Passive voiceVerbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
64Variety of ExpressionSentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 6 Literacy

#TOPICTITLE
1PronounsPronouns
Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun.
2PronounsPronouns 2
Objective: To recognise and use personal, possessive and relative pronouns.
3PunctuationCommas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
4Commas 2Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
5ClausesClauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
6Mass and Count NounsDeterminers
Objective: To identify and use determiners correctly with mass and count nouns.
7VerbsVerbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
8Verb tense – CompoundVerb tense – Compound
Objective: To identify and use ‘to be’ and ‘to have’ with the appropriate participle of the main verb.
9Spelling SkillsSpelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
10Advanced Dictionary UseAdvanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
11PrefixesPrefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
12SuffixesSuffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
13MnemonicsSpelling – Mnemonics
Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling.
14Spelling SkillsSyllabification
Objective: To improve spelling by dividing words correctly into syllables.
15AdjectivesAdjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
16AdverbsAdverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
17Modal VerbsModal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
18Verbs – Active and Passive voiceVerbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
19GerundsGerunds
Objective: To identify and use gerunds.
20Similes and MetaphorsSimiles and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
21Participles – as Verbs and AdjectivesParticiples – as Verbs and Adjectives
Objective: To identify and use participles as verbs or adjectives as indicators of continuing action.
22Verbs – Active and Passive voiceVerbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
23MnemonicsSpelling – Mnemonics
Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling.
24Essay Writing 2Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
25AdjectivesAdjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
26AdverbsAdverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
27Similes and MetaphorsSimiles and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
28Figurative LanguageSymbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
29Figurative LanguageOnomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
30Spelling SkillsWord Usage
Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning.
31Review of Figures of SpeechReview of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
32Have you met?Hello!
Objective: Use the present tense verb to be (am, is and are) correctly in written and spoken work. Answer comprehension questions and apply am, is and are correctly.
33Have you met?The world in a classroom!
Objective: At the end of this lesson, students will have learnt how to ask a question in English, and how to use the definite and indefinite articles.
34Modal VerbsModal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
35Transitive and Intransitive VerbsTransitive and Intransitive Verbs
Objective: To identify and use transitive and intransitive verbs.
36Case – Nouns and PronounsCase – Nouns, Pronouns and Possessive Adjectives
Objective: To identify the case of nouns and pronouns.
37Participles – as Verbs and AdjectivesParticiples – as Verbs and Adjectives
Objective: To identify and use participles as verbs or adjectives as indicators of continuing action.
38VerbsVerbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
39Conjunctions – SentencesConjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
40Sentence ImprovementSentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
41Variety of ExpressionSentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
42Review of Figures of SpeechReview of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 7 Literacy

#TOPICTITLE
1MnemonicsSpelling – Mnemonics
Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling.
2Essay Writing 2Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
3PhrasesPhrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
4ClausesClauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
5Parts of Speech Part aPrepositions
Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly.
6Parts of Speech Part bConjunctions
Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly.
7Conjunctions – SentencesConjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
8Sentence ImprovementSentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
9Variety of ExpressionSentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
10Commas 2Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
11Punctuation Skills Part bQuotation Marks
Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech.
12Colons and Semi-ColonsColons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
13Apostrophe – PossessionApostrophe – Possession
Objective: To use the apostrophe of possession correctly.
14PunctuationPunctuation – Various
Objective: To use hyphens, dashes, apostrophes, quotation marks, parentheses and brackets correctly.
15InterjectionsInterjections
Objective: To identify and use interjections correctly.
16ClausesClauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
17Sentence Structure Part aSubject and Predicate
Objective: To identify the subject and predicate within a sentence and to understand they are the two main parts of a sentence.
18Modal VerbsModal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
19AdjectivesAdjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
20AdverbsAdverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
21Big day out!First and second conditionals
Objective: Learn the use of first conditionals. Learn the use of second conditionals.
22Let’s hit the beach!Modals of obligation
Objective: Learn about modals of obligation.
23Let’s hit the beach!Imperatives
Objective: Learn how to use imperatives.
24Spelling SkillsSpelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
25PrefixesPrefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
26SuffixesSuffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
27Advanced Dictionary UseAdvanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
28Conjunctions – SentencesConjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
29Sentence ImprovementSentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
30Variety of ExpressionSentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
31VerbsVerbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 8 Literacy

#TOPICTITLE
1Conjunctions – SentencesConjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
2Sentence ImprovementSentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
3Transitive and Intransitive VerbsTransitive and Intransitive Verbs
Objective: To identify and use transitive and intransitive verbs.
4Case – Nouns and PronounsCase – Nouns, Pronouns and Possessive Adjectives
Objective: To identify the case of nouns and pronouns.
5Variety of ExpressionSentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
6PunctuationPunctuation – Various
Objective: To use hyphens, dashes, apostrophes, quotation marks, parentheses and brackets correctly.
7Colons and Semi-ColonsColons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
8PunctuationPunctuation – Various
Objective: To use hyphens, dashes, apostrophes, quotation marks, parentheses and brackets correctly.
9Commas 2Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
10Punctuation Skills Part bQuotation Marks
Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech.
11PhrasesPhrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
12ClausesClauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
13Sentence ImprovementSentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
14Transitive and Intransitive VerbsTransitive and Intransitive Verbs
Objective: To identify and use transitive and intransitive verbs.
15Case – Nouns and PronounsCase – Nouns, Pronouns and Possessive Adjectives
Objective: To identify the case of nouns and pronouns.
16Variety of ExpressionSentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
17Verbs – Active and Passive voiceVerbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
18Review of Figures of SpeechReview of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
19Advanced Dictionary UseAdvanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
20PluralsPlurals 1 – simple
Objective: To form plurals (more than one) by adding ‘s’ and ‘es’ correctly.
21PluralsPlurals 2 – special rules
Objective: To form plurals with special rules: words ending in ‘y’ and ‘f’.
22PluralsPlurals 3 – Unusual
Objective: To create unusual plurals: for words ending in ‘o'; by changing the vowels or by adding letters.
23PluralsPlurals 4 – Unusual
Objective: To use nouns whose singular and plural forms are the same. To use compound noun plurals.
24Plurals of Foreign NounsPlurals 5 – Foreign
Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns.
25Spelling SkillsSpelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
26PrefixesPrefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
27SuffixesSuffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
28Sentence ImprovementSentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
29Variety of ExpressionSentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
30Similes and MetaphorsSimiles and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
31Figurative LanguageSymbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
32Figurative LanguageOnomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
33Review of Figures of SpeechReview of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
34Advanced Dictionary UseAdvanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
35Antonyms and SynonymsAntonyms and Synonyms
Objective: To identify and use antonyms and synonyms.
36Essay Writing 2Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
37VerbsVerbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
38Conjunctions – SentencesConjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 9 Literacy

#TOPICTITLE
1Similes and MetaphorsSimiles and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
2Figurative LanguageSymbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
3Figurative LanguageOnomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
4Review of Figures of SpeechReview of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
5Conjunctions – SentencesConjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
6Big day out!First and second conditionals
Objective: Learn the use of first conditionals. Learn the use of second conditionals.
7BBQ Party!Sequence markers
Objective: Learn the words used in sequences or ordering.
8Mass and Count NounsDeterminers
Objective: To identify and use determiners correctly with mass and count nouns.
9Let’s hit the beach!Modals of obligation
Objective: Learn about modals of obligation.
10Let’s hit the beach!Imperatives
Objective: Learn how to use imperatives.
11Colons and Semi-ColonsColons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
12Sentence ImprovementSentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
13Variety of ExpressionSentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
14ClausesClauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
15Similes and MetaphorsSimiles and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
16Figurative LanguageSymbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
17Figurative LanguageOnomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
18Review of Figures of SpeechReview of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
19Similes and MetaphorsSimiles and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
20Figurative LanguageSymbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
21Similes and MetaphorsSimiles and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
22Figurative LanguageSymbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
23Figurative LanguageOnomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
24Review of Figures of SpeechReview of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
25Similes and MetaphorsSimiles and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
26Figurative LanguageSymbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
27Similes and MetaphorsSimiles and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
28Figurative LanguageSymbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
29Essay Writing 2Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
30VerbsVerbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
31Conjunctions – SentencesConjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
32Sentence ImprovementSentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
33Variety of ExpressionSentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
34Review of Figures of SpeechReview of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 10 Literacy

#TOPICTITLE
1PronounsPronouns 2
Objective: To recognise and use personal, possessive and relative pronouns.
2Essay Writing 2Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
3Verbs – Active and Passive voiceVerbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
4Sentence ImprovementSentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
5ClausesClauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
6NounsCollective and Abstract Nouns
Objective: To identify and use collective and abstract nouns.
7Figurative LanguageSymbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
8Similes and MetaphorsSimiles and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
9Figurative LanguageSymbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
10Figurative LanguageOnomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
11Review of Figures of SpeechReview of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
12Essay Writing 2Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
13Essay Writing 2Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
14VerbsVerbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
15Conjunctions – SentencesConjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
16Sentence ImprovementSentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
17Variety of ExpressionSentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
18Review of Figures of SpeechReview of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
Go to top